1

0
0
0
Z
0
1
T
0
4
1
8
0
0
TPS S,stem 1000
Pregrems
Yersiea 2.2
Iaglisb
0
S
I
h
'
S

N
4

0
4
l
2 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
Congratulations on your purchase of your programs
for a TPS - System 1000 !
In order to use the software correctly and reliably, you
must follow the instructions given in the user manual or
in the on-line help system. You must also adhere to the
directions given in the user manual for the product with
which you are using the software.
The rights and responsibilities accruing in respect to
Leica as a result of acquisition of the software are set
out in the Leica Software License Agreement.
To secure your rights with regard to the software
acquired, it is essential that you follow the directions
given on the Leica Software - Support Registration
Card.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 3
Enter your programs' version number in your manual
and always refer to this information when you need to
contact your agency or authorized service workshop.
Version number:
TPS S,stem 1000
Pregrems
Predact ideatilicetiea
4 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
The symbols used in this User's Manual have the
following meanings:
DANGER :
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if
not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING :
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation or an
unintended use which, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury.
CAUTION :
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation or an
unintended use which, if not avoided, may result in
minor or moderate injury and / or appreciable material,
financial and environmental damage.
Important paragraphs which must be adhered to in
practice as they enable the product to be used in a
technically correct and efficient manner.
S,mbels ased ia tbis Neaael
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 5
Contents 6
Introduction 11
General notes 23
Orientation and Height Transfer 27
Resection 39
Tie Distance 49
Stakeout 59
Free Station 79
Reference Line 93
Remote Height 105
Hidden Point 111
Area (Computation of Area) 117
Sets of Angles 129
Traverse 147
Local Resection 165
Road Line 171
COGO 205
Road Plus 249
File Editor 303
Monitoring 333
Index 341
CO
IN
GN
OH
RE
TD
SO
FS
RL
RH
HP
AR
SA
TR
LR
RO
CG
RP
FE
MO
IX
Yien el cbeters
6 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
0eateats
CO
Introduction 11
General 11
Installation in the PC 12
Hardware and software required 12
Rules for naming files 15
Loading files into the TPS1000 instruments 17
Loading system texts 19
Loading application programs 20
Licence code 21
Solving problems 21
General notes 23
Units in this manual 23
Preparation 23
Settings 23
Data exchange 24
Using the program 24
Instrument field setup 24
Calling up the program 25
Designation of keys 26
Target eccentricity 26
Orientation and Height Transfer 27
Introduction 27
Target Point 28
Point List 29
Measure Mode 30
Calculation 31
More Information 32
Plot 34
Configuration 35
Configuration Editor 35
Dual-face Measurement 37
Log file 37
Resection 39
Introduction 39
Station Data 40
Target Point 41
Measure Mode 42
Calculation 43
Configuration 45
Configuration Editor 45
Dual-face Measurement 47
Log File 47
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 7
CO
Tie Distance 49
Introduction 49
Measure Mode 51
Results 53
Configuration 55
Configuration Editor 55
Dual-face Measurement 56
Log File 57
Stakeout 59
Introduction 59
Search Point 59
Coarse Positioning 60
Line Offset 60
Orthogonal 62
Azimuth and Distance 64
Stakeout 66
Polar Stakeout 66
Orthogonal Stakeout 68
Stakeout with auxiliary points 70
Stakeout from Coordinate Differences 72
Select Stakeout Method 74
Plot 75
Configuration 76
Log File 77
Free Station 79
Introduction 79
Station Data 80
Target Point 80
Point List 81
Measure Mode 82
Calculation 83
More Information 85
Plot 87
Configuration 88
Configuration Editor 88
Dual-face Measurement 90
Log File 90
Reference Line 93
Introduction 93
Baseline Points 95
Determine Base Points 95
Measure a Base Point 96
Define Reference Line 98
Results Reference Line 99
Configuration 101
Configuration Editor 101
Log File 103
8 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
CO
Remote Height 105
Introduction 105
Measure Base Point 106
Measure Remote Point 108
Configuration 110
Hidden Point 111
Introduction 111
Configuration 112
Measure Rod 114
Results 115
Area (Computation of Area) 117
Introduction 117
Measure Mode 118
Straight line 118
Arcs 120
Calculation 123
Plot 124
Configuration 125
Configuration Editor 125
Dual-face Measurement 126
Log File 127
Sets of Angles 129
Introduction 129
Sets Menu 130
Sets menu - view 130
Measure Mode 131
Calculate Mode 135
Examples and used formulae 140
Configuration 143
Configuration Editor 143
Log File 145
Traverse 147
Introduction 147
Traverse Menu 148
Traverse menu 148
New traverse 149
Occupy station 153
Traverse Point / Sideshot Point 155
Close traverse 156
Plot 159
Configuration 160
Configuration Editor 160
Dual-face Measurement 161
Multiple Measurement 161
Log File 163
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 9
CO
Local Resection 165
Introduction 165
Station Data 166
Target Points 167
Calculation 168
Configuration 169
Configuration Editor 169
Dual-face Measurement 170
Road line 171
Introduction 171
Program concept 174
Alignment 175
Selection of files 175
Checking files 176
Program flow 178
Chainage and centre-line offset 178
Cross sections 180
Stakeout 183
X-section Check 184
Configuration 188
Configuration Editor 188
Log File 190
Data format 192
Hz-alignment 192
The Road - Data Entry program 204
COGO 205
Introduction 205
Configuration 207
Function selection (COGO Menu) 208
Inverse (polar calculation) 209
Traverse 212
Defining direction by magnetic bearing 214
Defining direction by Azimuth 216
Defining horizontal distance 218
Intersections 221
Bearing-Bearing Intersection 222
Bearing-Distance Intersection 227
Distance-Distance Intersection 233
Offsets 237
Distance-Offset 238
Orthogonal point calculation 241
Three Point Arc 246
Road Plus 249
Introduction 249
Alignment Definition 249
Data Files 249
Creating Data Files 252
Program Overview 252
10 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
CO
Getting Started 253
Configuration 254
Select Alignment Files 256
Vertical Alignment File 257
Horizontal Alignment File 257
Cross Section/template File 257
Cross Section Assignment File 259
Station Equation File 262
File Checking 263
Stakeout Using Horizontal Offset 264
Preparing for the example 264
Select Template point and offset 270
Stakeout and Record point 273
Horizontal Offset Stake Out Summary 280
Start ROADPLUS & Set Configuration Options 280
Select Alignment Files 281
Set offset value and select point to stakeout 282
Stakeout the point 283
Select new chainage 284
Slope Staking 285
Reference Point 289
Data Formats 291
Horizontal Alignment 291
Vertical Alignment 294
Cross Sections 296
Cross Section Assignments 298
Station Equations 300
Log File 301
File Editor 303
Introduction 303
Creation of files 303
Editing files 304
Open file 305
Coordinates 306
Horizontal Alignment 311
Vertical Alignment 317
Template 321
Station Equation 325
Cross-section Assignment 329
Monitoring 333
Main menu 335
Selecting points 336
Measurement menu 337
Selecting the points to be measured 338
Timer selection 339
Point measurement 340
End monitoring 340
Index 341
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 11
IN
The electronic theodolites and total stations in the TPS
System 1000 are equipped with programs for
processing field data and control-point coordinates. The
systems are therefore highly functional and classical
survey tasks are simplified appreciably.
When delivered, the instruments are already equipped
for the following standard applications:
- Orientation and height transfer
- Resection
- Tie distance
- Stakeout
- Free-station survey (Licence code required)
In addition, the following applications are delivered on
diskette:
- Reference line / building alignment
- Remote height
- Hidden points
- Computation of area
- Sets of angles
- Traverse
- Local resection
- Roadline
- File Editor
- Road Plus
- COGO
- Monitoring
This list is extended continuously. Find actual
information in file README.TXT on diskette.
The additional application programs can be loaded into
the instrument, but can only be run as a demonstration
version in which certain functions are disabled. Full
functionality can be obtained with a licence code,
available from your Leica agency, where you can also
obtain information about the newest programs available
in the ongoing applications-software development
latredactiea
0eaerel
12 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IN
project.
All installation programs and applications are supplied
on normal 3 1/2" diskettes.
For optimal use of the programs and instruments read
this manual carefully.
The hardware and software used to transfer the
individual program packages must meet the following
requirements:
IBM-compatible PC, 386 or higher
4 MB RAM
3.5" floppy-disk drive
RS 232 interface, including interface cable for Leica
survey instruments (stock no. 563625)
MS DOS 5.0 or higher
MS Windows 3.1
Four diskettes are supplied with each instrument:
disk 1 = SYSTEM FIRMWARE
disk 2 = Programs and Languages
disk 3 = TPS-WORKBENCH
disk 4 = RCS 1000
More information can be found in the file
README.TXT on each diskette.
Recommended installation procedure:
1. TPS-WORKBENCH (disk 3)
2. SYSTEM FIRMWARE (disk 1)
3. Programs and languages (disk 2)
4. RCS 1000 (disk 4)
Hardware and software
required
lastelletiea ia tbe P0
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 13
IN
On the diskette bearing the label
TPS 1000/2000/5000
TPS-WORKBENCH
is the PC software needed to install applications or
foreign-language texts on the TPS1000 instruments.
Exit F3
Pause
Continue
Exit
Directory...

Install to:
C:\LEICA.WB
Installation Options:
TPS Software Upload 378 KB
RCS 1000 Controller Upload 57 KB
TPS Code Development 157 KB
Software Radio Configuration 123 KB
TPS PC to MC / MC to PC 277 KB
Installation Drive: C:
Space Required: 1697 KB
Space Available: ...... KB
Installation TPS
Workbench TPS Tools 2.21
Installation
The "WORKBENCH" program is installed in the PC
by running the program "SETUP.EXE" under
WINDOWS on the diskette. For further details, refer to
the handbook or to the HELP file of WINDOWS.
TPS-user just have to install the "TPS Softwae
Upload".
14 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IN
The diskette bearing the label
TPS 1000
SYSTEM FIRMWARE
contains the necessary system software for the TPS
1000 instrument:
theodolite system software
ATR system software
EDM system software
The diskette bearing the label
TPS 2000/5000
SYSTEM FIRMWARE
contains the necessary system software for the
TPS2000/5000 instrument:
theodolite system software
ATR system software
EDM system software
The diskette bearing the label
TPS 1000/2000/5000
Programs and Languages
contains:
all applications (both the standard ones and the
additional ones),
the appropriate text files for the languages available.
The text for the languages available are also included
for the TPS1000 system software.
The diskette bearing the label
TPS 1000/2000/5000
RCS 1000
contains the remote control software:
for RCS 1000 based on CR233/333
for RCS 1000 based on GPC1
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 15
IN
The files are named in accordance with the following
rules:
Application programs: ?????VVV.PRG
????? Maximum of 5 characters for name of
application
VVV 3 characters for version (release) number
PRG Identification tag for loadable application
Text files: ?????VVV.LSS
????? identical name of relevant application
VVV identical version (release) number of relevant
application
L Identification tag for text file of application
SS Identification tag for language
SS => EN English
GE German
FR French
SP Spanish
System texts:SYS?_VVV._SS
SYS?_ Seven text files (SYS1_ ... SYS7_)
VVV Version (release) number of system texts
Identification tag for text file of system
SS Identification tag for language
SS => GE German
FR French
SP Spanish
Rules for naming files
16 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IN
After the installation is complete, you will find the
following files in the subdirectory in your PC:
Standard applications
Application File name Text file Remarks
All prtxtVVV.LEN
prtxtVVV.LGE
prtxtVVV.LFR
prtxtVVV.LSP
Texts common
to all
applications
Orientation and
height transfer
ORI__VVV.PRG ORI__VVV.LEN
ORI__VVV.LGE
ORI__VVV.LFR
ORI__VVV.LSP
English
German
French
Spanish
Tie distance TIE__VVV.PRG TIE_VVV.LENetc.
Resection RESECVVV.PRG RESECVVV.LENetc.
Stakeout STAKEVVV.PRG STAKEVVV.LENetc.
Additional applications
Application File name Text file Stock no.
Free-station survey FREE_VVV.PRG FREE_VVV.LEN etc. 663156
Reference line /
building alignment
REFL_VVV.PRG REFL_VVV.LEN etc. 663198
Hidden points HDNPTVVV.PR HDNPTVVV.LEN etc. 663213
Remote height REMHTVVV.PR REMHTVVV.LEN etc. 663200
Traverse TRAV_VVV.PRG TRAV_VVV.LEN etc. 663197
Computation of area AREA_VVV.PRG AREA_VVV.LEN etc. 663196
Sets of angles SETS_VVV.PRG SETS_VVV.LEN etc. 663199
Local Resection LRES_VVV.PRG LRES_VVV.LEN etc. 663267
Road Line ROADLVVV.PR ROADLVVV.LEN etc. 663216
File Editor FILEDVVV.PRG FILEDVVV.LEN etc. 663217
Road Plus RPLUSVVV.PRG RPLUSVVV.LEN etc. 663218
COGO COGO_VVV.PRG COGO_VVV.LEN etc. 664401
Monitoring MONIT222.PRG MONIT222.LEN etc. 664411
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 17
IN
leediag liles iate tbe
TPS1000 iastrameats
Applications, and system- and application texts, are
loaded into the TPS1000 by means of the "TPS
SOFTWARE UPLOAD" program.
Use the interface cable 563 625 to connect the
TPS1000 to the serial interface COM1 or COM2 on the
PC.
Start the "TPS SOFTWARE UPLOAD" program with a
double-click from the WINDOWS program manager.
Select the command "Sensor/Settings" and inspect the
interface selected and the baud rate. The baud rate
should be set to the maximum. The baud rate for the
TPS1000 instrument is set automatically.
TPS 1000 Settings
Baudrate
4800
9600
19200
OK
Cancel
Help
COM-Port:
COM1
18 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IN
Switch the instrument off! Select the command "View
Applications + System" to inspect the connection to the
instrument. The instrument switches itself on again and
establishes the connection. The display of the
applications available on the instrument shows that the
connection was successful. If it was not successful, read
section "Solving problems".
View Applications & System
Close
Help
General Environment Applications
Name Art.No. Licence Code
Version Language
FreeSt_Ori_Res 663156 <none>
V 2.20 ENGLISH

TieDistance 663152 <none>

V 2.20 ENGLISH

Stakeout 663155 <none>

V 2.20 ENGLISH

Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 19

IN
Loading system texts
Afterwards, enter the language on the instrument (see
section "Configuration" of "System" - user manual).
The English system texts are part of the system software
and can be neither loaded nor erased.
Transfer
Transfer
Cancel
Settings ...
Help
Directories:
i:\software\tps1000\V_2_20
i:\
software
tps1000
V_2_20
Drives:
i:
Component Type
System Software
System Language
Application Program
EDM/ATR Firmware
Language:
ENGLISH-T
Components:
System Language (ENGLISH-T Version 2.20)

- Select the command "Transfer files" in the "Utilities"

menu ,
- Mark "System Language",
- select relevant drive under "Directories",
- select desired language under "Language" and
- mark relevant file under "Components".
Then press the
Transfer
key to start the transfer.
The progress of the transfer is shown in a bar diagram.
20 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IN
Loading application
programs
- Select the command "Transfer files" in the "Utilities"
menu ,
- Mark "Application Program",
- select relevant drive under "Directories",
- select desired language under "Language" and
- mark desired program(s) under "Components".
Then press the
Transfer
key to start the transfer.
The progress of the transfer is shown in a bar diagram.
Transfer
Transfer
Cancel
Settings ...
Help

Directories:
i:\software\tps1000\V_2_20
i:\
software
tps1000
V_2_20
Drives:
i:
Component Type
System Software
System Language
Application Program
EDM/ATR Firmware
Language:
ENGLISH-T
Components:
TPS-Application Area (V2.20)
TPS-Application COGO (V2.20)
TPS-Application FreeSt_Ori_Res (V2.20)
TPS-Application HiddenPoint (V2.20)
TPS-Application LocalRes (V2.20)
TPS-Application RefLine (V2.20)
It is absolutely necessary that the program files
(*.prg) are be in the same directory as the language
files (*.LSS) and the Prtxt220.LSS file.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 21
IN
Licence code
When an additional application is first started up, a
licence code is requested, so that the application will be
fully functional. Without this licence code, you can run
the applications as a demonstration version, but you will
not be able to calculate and store the results.
The licence code is available from your Leica agency,
who will inform you about licence fees for additional
applications. Details of the licence agreement are given
in the registration card, which is a part of the "System"
manual.
To expedite formalities, please fill in a copy of the form
at the end of this section and fax it to your local Leica
agency.
Solving problems 1. Instrument does not switch on when "Utilities/View
Applications + System..." option is selected.
Inspect the cable connections and that the serial
interface COM1 or COM2 has been set correctly.
2. Instrument does not switch to "ON-LINE-MODE
(GeoCOM)" mode when "Utilities/View
Applications + System..." option is selected.
Make sure that the instrument is switched off before
the "Utilities/View Applications + System..." option
is activated.
3. Instrument does not switch to "ON-LINE-MODE
(GeoCOM)" mode when "Utilities/View
Applications + System..." option is selected;
"MEASURE & RECORD" menu or another autostart
application is displayed instead.
22 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IN
Carry out the following operations on the instrument:
until main menu is displayed.
[CONF] Configuration
[Autostart] Autoexec-application
[LIST] and select "MAIN MENU"
Switch off the instrument and start the data transfer
process from the beginning.
or
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 23
IN
Put crosses against the applications you require and send the form to your nearest
Leica agency, which will process your order.
/s/ts ses,stsms 4
se4ss,
lh043b hss///e
/Su/tcs//ss4/
Se/tus/s Mssssmsst 0sct.
//ess -41 71 727 3 81
/ss -41 71 727 47 0b
Address of customer (please use Company stamp or write legibly)
(Company stamp, signature)
To be filled
in by
agency and
forwarded
to Leica
Geosystems
AG,
Heerbrugg.
We confirm taking out
a licence for the
applications listed
above, and we
guarantee to pay the
licence fees to Leica
Geosystems AG.
Name
Company
Street
Zip code / City
Country
Telephone
Telefax
Remarks
(Company stamp, signature)
Licence code for TPS 1000 applications
Serial number TPS1000 Instrument type
Name of application No. of application Licence code Remarks
Free station survey 663156
Computation of area 663196
Traverse 663197
Reference line/building
alig.
663198
Sets of angles 663199
Remote height 663200
Hidden points 663213
Local resection 663267
Road Line 663216
File Editor 663217
Road Plus 663218
COGO 664401
Monitoring 664411
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 23
EL
GN
0eaerel aetes
Settings To avoid temporarily-stored information being lost
when the TPS1000 automatically switches off after long
periods of disuse, you should set the "sleep mode"
instead of the automatic switchoff. For more
information, please refer to section "Fixed keys"
("Power off, Sleep") of "System" - user manual.
Each application takes over the settings (units,
recording format, display format etc.) allocated to the
appropriate user.
Specifications within this manual always apply to the
following units:
Units of length:
- in m (meters)
- in addition, within brackets in ft (feet)
Units of angle:
- in ' "
- in addition, within brackets in gon
Units of temperature:
- in C
- in addition, within brackets in F
0aits ia tbis meaael
Preeretiea All program sequences are based on a unified structure.
The clearly-designed display with the function keys
makes learning easy. Each program has a configuration
dialog. In this dialog, the user can match program-
specific parameters to changes in requirements and
sequences. The various possibilities are described in the
instructions for the individual programs.
24 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
EL
GN
Data exchange If the settings in an application are altered, these
changed values will be taken over in the other
applications also and in Measure and record. The
settings affected are the station coordinates and the
circle orientation, along with parameters such as the
reflector constant, reflector height, and data for distance
reduction. This data can be altered in every application.
The measurement data is stored in the file selected.
If required, these user settings must be defined in
advance. For more information, please refer to section
"User configuration" of "System" - user manual.
0siag tbe regrem
Instrument field setup
The setup is called up in the main menu.
To start with, the user profile and the file for storing
measurement data can be selected in the start-up
display.
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
14:03
QSET STN LIST
SETUP\ START-UP DISPLAY
HELP
Select user template & files
User templ. :Polar(Standard)
Rec. device : Memory Card
Meas. file :1 FILE01.GSI
Data file :2 FILE02.GSI
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 25
EL
GN
Calling up the program
The applications are called up in the main menu.
Select the application required and
confirm
or
alternatively type in the number which appears after the
program name in the display.
...
MAIN MENU: PROGRAMS 14:03
EXTRA CAL CONF DATA SETUP MEAS
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
Orientation & Ht. Transfer 00
Resection 01
Stakeout 02
Tie Distance 03
Free Station 04
HELP
The dialog enables station coordinates to be set or
imported and also permits a direction to a tie point to be
set.
SETUP\ STATION DATA 14:03
REC Hz0 IMPOR NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
Station no. : STATION 12
Inst.Height : 1.634 m
Stat.Easting: 1010.567 m
Stat.Northg : -34213.077 m
Stat.Elev. : 345.655 m
Hz : 39035'58"
The station number, the coordinates, the direction of the
line of sight, and the instrument height, are all displayed
26 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
EL
GN
The effects of the fixed keys and of a few function keys are
the same as their effects in "MEASURE AND RECORD".
These keys are generally omitted from the descriptions
of the applications and from the ON-LINE help.
Designation of keys
Continues sequence after input, measurements etc. have
been concluded. If the measurement dialog is concluded
with the measurement data will not be recorded.
Erases incorrect alphanumeric input.
If the reflector cannot be set up directly over the
desired point, or if the point cannot be seen from the
instrument, the function 'OFFS' may be used to make an
offset measurement.
Previous to the input of the values for eccentricity, a
distance must be measured to the reflector.
For more information, please refer to section
'Measurement & recording' of 'System'-user manual.
Records in a pre-established format manually-entered
coordinates, measurements or the results of
calculations.
Quits current dialog and calls up previous dialog.
Changes and inputs to dialog are rejected and are not
stored.
Displays the second level of the function keys -
.
Calls ON-LINE help.
Closes application.
Calls up code input or code function in measurement
dialog.
"REC"
Target eccentricity
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 27
OH
This manual describes the "Orientation and Height
Transfer" program of the TPS SYSTEM 1000
theodolite series.
The instrument must be set up on a known point. The
program "ORIENTATION" calculates an angular
correction for the instruments horizontal circle, so that
0.0000 of the horizontal circle corresponds with grid
north (Orientation correction), using reference points
with known Easting and Northing.
For simultaneous determination of the station elevation,
height of instrument and height of reflector must
already have been input and the elevation of the target
points must be known.
The program handles a maximum of 10 points.
0rieatetiea ead heigbt Treasler
latredactiea
E
000'00"
H N
P
R
O
G
_
Z
0
1
E0
N0
H0
E
N
H
Hz
H
28 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
OH
Terget Peiat Enter the target point number and height of the reflector
.
ORINT\ TARGET POINT 14:03
CALC LIST <-- -->
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP CONF
M
C
Point no. : 12
Refl.Height : 1.300 m
Run the calculation. Note, the key will be assigned
after the first measurement.
Entry of target points into a list as well as selecting
points for further use.
Displays the previous point from the list of points
entered. Note that this key will not be available until
there is at least one point in the list.
Displays the next point in the list of points entered.
Note that this key will not be available until there is at
least one point in the list.
Retrieve the coordinates of the target point from the
selected file. For further information, please refer to
dialog "IMPORT" described in the "System" - user
manual.
Start the "CONFIGURATION"
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 29
OH
Point List Enter a maximum of 10 points. The same point can be
retrieved several times.
ORINT\ POINT LIST 14:03
Point 7 : 7
Point 8 : 8
Point 9 : 9
Point10 : 0
M
C
Point 1 : 1
Point 2 : 2
Point 3 : 3
Point 4 : 4
Point 5 : 5
Point 6 : 6
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
Return to the dialog "Target Point".
30 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
OH
Neesare Nede This dialog is similar to the TPS 1000s basic "Measure
Mode" dialog. Once a measurement is taken, the
program will return to the dialog "Target Point" to
acquire the next point for measuring.
If the orientation correction can be calculated
successfully from any of the first measurements, the
Hz and V values are displayed for further entered
target point. Motorized theodolites will automatically
drive the telescope to the target point.
Simultaneously measure and record data on the active
recording device. Return to the dialog "Target Point".
Measure a distance.
Record the measurement on the active recording device.
Return to the dialog "Target Point".
Enter target data. For further information, please refer
to chapter "Measure & Record" described in the
"System" - user manual.
Change the theodolite face.
Call up the CODE function, as described in chapter
"Measure & Record" described in the "System" - user
manual.
Exit the program.
Accept the measurement and return to the dialog
"Target Point".
ORINT\ MEASURE MODE (GSI)14:03
ALL DIST REC TARGT
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
Point no. : 1
Hz : 21655'50"
V : 7116'20"
Refl.Height : 1.300 m
Slope Dist. : 385.231 m
Hz : -----
HELP I<>II
M
C
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 31
OH
0elcaletiea Calculates the orientation, the elevation and the
respective standard deviations.
ORINT\ RESULTS <ROBUST> 14:03
S.ORI S.HT STORE PLOT MORE
Orientation : 212'34"
Elevation : 0.010 m
Orient : 000'03"
M
C
Station no. : 10
No. of Pts. : 5
Inst.Height : 1.635 m
Easting : 2134.234 m
Northing : 4723.365 m
Elevation : 521.643 m
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP LSQRS
Station no : Point number assigned to the station
No. of Pts : Number of points measured
Inst.Height : Instrument Height
Easting : Easting of the station entered.
Northing : Northing of the station entered.
Elevation : Calculated elevation of the station
Orientation : Oriented direction
Elevation : Standard deviation of the Elevation
Orient : Standard deviation of the Orientation
Set orientation on the instrument. Note that once this
key has been pressed it will not be possible to
execute more measurements.
Set station elevation on the instrument. Note that once
this key has been pressed it will not be possible to
execute more measurements.
32 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
OH
Record the following results into the active file:
WI 11 Station Point Number
WI 25 Orientation correction
WI 84 Station Easting
WI 85 Station Northing
WI 86 Station Elevation
WI 87 Last reflector height used
WI 88 Instrument Height
Sketch of the station and the reference points used.
Show the results of individual measurements on the
screen (see dialog "More Information").
Measure more points. The program will recall the
"TARGET POINT" dialog.
Select between the "Robust" method and the "Variati-
on" method.
More Information Display the residuals of individual measurements. You
can also disable points from the calculation of
orientation or height as well as delete erroneous
measured points.
ORINT\ MORE INFORMATION 14:03
RECLC <-- --> MEAS DEL NO
2/10
Use for HT. : YES Status: ON
Point no. : Point01
Error flag : NONE
Hz : 000'03"
Distance : 0.050 m
M
C
Height : 0.020 m
Refl.Height : 1.555 m
Easting : 991.427 m
Northing : 1995.162 m
Elevation : 402.466 m
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 33
OH
2/10 : Sequence number of the current point
and total number of points in the
measurement set. The scroll bar shows
the sequential position of the
measurements, graphically.
Use for Ht. : Use this measurement for height
determination (YES/NO)
Status : Use this measurement for calculation
(ON/OFF).
Point no : The target point number.
Error Flag : Identified erroneous measurements.
Possible values are:
NONE measurement is OK
HZ horizontal angle error
DIST distance error
HT height difference error
The flags may also be combined, i.e.
DIST + HZ
Hz. : Difference between calculated and
measured horizontal angle
Distance : Difference between calculated and
measured distance
Height : Difference between calculated and
measured height
Refl. Ht. : Reflector height used for the target
point
Easting, Northing, Elevation: Target coordinates used.
Recalculate the result.
Scroll to the measurements of the previous point.
Scroll to the measurements of the following point.
Measure more points. Return to the dialog "Target
Point".
Delete a point from the set of measurements. You can
now measure a new point in its place.
Exit the program.
34 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
OH
Plet Generates a plot showing the measurement
configuration.
The station point is in the center and the top of the
sketch shows the direction of grid north. The sketch is
true in angular but not true in distances.
Points are numbered sequentially in the order in witch
they were measured.
Points not used in the calculation are marked with a
dotted line.
ORINT\ PLOT 14:03
RECLC MEAS
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
1
5
4
3
2
Recalculate the result and return to the dialog
"CALCULATION RESULTS".
Measure more points. The program will recall the
"TARGET POINT" dialog.
Toggle any point ON or OFF by pressing the numeric
key corresponding to the sequence number of the point.
Note, that

represents point 10
Exit the program.
...
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 35
OH
0ealigaretiea
Configuration Editor
Start the "Configuration Editor" from the "TARGET-
POINT" dialog.
ORINT\ CONFIGURATION 14:03
Log FlName : ORIENT.LOG
M
C
Hz Ori Acc : 000'32"
Ht Acc TP : 0.0250 m
Posn Acc TP : 0.0250 m
Two faces : NO
User Displ : NO
Log File : OFF
INFO DFLT EDIT
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
The "Configuration Editor "sets parameters for further
program operations:
Hz Ori Acc : Limit for the standard deviation of the
orientation. The orientation is
regarded as "error free", if the
computed standard deviation of the
orientation is within twice the entered
value.
Ht Acc TP : Height accuracy of the target points.
The entered value, is used as an "a
priori" accuracy in the calculation.
The height is regarded as "error free",
if the computed standard deviation is
within twice the entered value.
36 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
OH
Posn Acc TP : Position accuracy of the target points.
The entered value, is used as an "a
priori" accuracy in the calculation.
The position is regarded as "error
free", if the computed standard
deviation is within twice the entered
value.
Two Faces : YES for dual-face measurement,
NO for single-face.
User Disp : YES; the measured value indication is
used from application "Measure and
record".
NO; the default indication is used for
"Orientation and Height Transfer".
Log File : ON, records measurements in a Log-
File.The format is described on page
37.
Log FlName : Enter the Log File Name.
Displays date and version.
Set the values to default. Default values are shown in
dialog on page 35.
Exit the program.
Store the current configuration and proceed to the
dialog "TARGET POINT".
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 37
OH
Dual-face Measurement
Log file
In the dual-face mode, the program will prompt for
measurements in both faces. When both measurements
are taken, the program will check the difference
between the two. If the difference in angle is within 27'
(0.5 gon) and the difference of two measured distances
is within 0.5 m (1.64 ft), the observations will be
averaged. These tolerances are used to avoid errors in
target identification. If exceeded an error message will
be displayed.
If "Log File" is set to "ON" the measurements and the
results are stored in the ASCII-file specified within the
"Configuration Editor". This file is created in the
directory LOG on the memory card. Subsequently, you
can read the memory card on your PC and obtain a hard
copy of the Log-file.
Data will always be appended to the specified Log-
file.
The Log-file contains the following information:
Header The header line will contain the
program used, information about the
instrument, the name of the data file as
well as date and time.
38 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
OH
Leica VIP Orientation + Ht. Transfer V 2.10
Instrument : TCM1100, Serial 412160, (not named)
User templ. : User 1
Meas. file : FILE12.GSI
Program Start : 09/04/1996 at 12:57
Station no. : 2000
E= -0.0006m N= -0.0002m ELV= 398.3961m hi= 1.6000m
Using Robust Solution
Station Elev. : 398.3929m
Ori.Corr. : 40'36"
S.Dev. Elev. : 0.0035m
S.Dev. Orient. : 000'04"
3 point(s) measured :
## Point no. Hz Height Distance Error Flag
1 500 -000'55" 0.0026m 0.0020m NONE
2 501 -000'48" 0.0044m 0.0016m NONE
3 502 000'52" -0.0070m -0.0000m NONE
Typical log file entry in the "Orientation and Height Transfer" program
Record For each measurement, a record will be
stored containing :
Station coordinates
station height,
orientation correction
standard deviations for
height and
orientation correction
The residuals for:
horizontal angles,
heights and
measured distances
are also listed.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 39
IV
EL
AH
OH
RE
hesectiea
latredactiea This manual describes the "Resection" program of the
TPS SYSTEM 1000 theodolite series.
The program can be used to deduce the three-dimensio-
nal coordinates for the instrument station and the
orientation of the horizontal circle from measurements
to 2 target points with know Easting and Northing. To
compute the position coordinates, at least the distances
and the directions for both points are necessary.
For simultaneous determination of the station elevation,
height of instrument and height of reflector must
already have been input and the elevation of the target
points must be known.
The program allows measurement in single or dual-face
mode.
H
N
P
R
O
G
_
Z
0
2
E
H0
000'00"
N0
E0
Hz1
Pt1
Pt2
Hz2
D2
D1
IV
EL
AH
OH
RE
40 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
Stetiea 0ete Enter station point number and height of the instrument.
RESEC\ STATION DATA 14:03
NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP CONF
Station no. : 1
Inst.Height : 1.555 m
Proceed to the dialog "Target PoinT"
Start the "Configuration"
M
C
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 41
IV
EL
AH
OH
RE
Terget Peiat Enter the target point number and height of the
reflector.
RESEC\ TARGET POINT 14:03
IMPOR NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
Point no. : 30
Refl.Height: 1.300 m
M
C
Retrieve the coordinates of the point entered from the
active file. For further information, please refer to
dialog "Import" described in the "System" - user
manual.
IV
EL
AH
OH
RE
42 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
Neesare Nede
This dialog is similar to the TPS System1000s basic
"Measure Mode" dialog. Once a measurement is taken,
the program will return to the dialog "Target Point" to
acquire the next point for measuring.
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP I<>II
RESEC\ MEASURE MOD (GSI) 14:03
Point no. : 1
Hz : 28655'50"
V : 9116'20"
Refl.Height : 0.000 m
Slope Dist. : ----- m
ALL DIST REC TARGT NUM
I
M
C
Simultaneously measure and record data on the active
recording device. Return to the dialog "TARGET
POINT".
Measure a distance.
Record the measurement on the active recording device.
Return to the dialog "TARGET POINT".
Enter target data as described in chapter "Measure &
Record" of the "System" - user manual.
Assigned with "aNUM" at point number input; assigned
with "EDIT" at numerical input.
Change the theodolite face.
Call up the CODE function, as described in chapter
"Measure & Record" of the "System" - user manual.
Exit the program.
Accept the measurement and return to the dialog
"TARGET POINT".
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 43
IV
EL
AH
OH
RE
0elcaletiea In this dialog the calculated station coordinates are
shown with the orientation.
RESEC\CALCULATION RESULTS14:03
SET STORE
Orientation : 212'34"
Easting : 0.003 m
Northing : 0.005 m
Elevation : 0.005 m
Orient : 000'03"
M
C
Station no. : 1
No. of Pts. : 2
Inst.Height : 1.635 m
Easting : 2134.234 m
Northing : 4231.365 m
Elevation : 580.643 m
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
Station no : Station point number
No. of Pts : Number of points measured
Inst.Height : Instrument Height
Easting : Calculated Easting (Y) for the station.
Northing : Calculated Northing (X) for the station.
Elevation : Calculated elevation for the station
Orientation : Oriented direction
Easting : Standard deviation of Easting
Northing : Standard deviation of Northing
Elevation : Standard deviation of the Elevation
Orient : Standard deviation of the Orientation
IV
EL
AH
OH
RE
44 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
Set orientation and station coordinates on the
instrument. Note that this key will end the program.
Record the following results on the active recording
device:
WI 11 Station Point Number
WI 25 Orientation correction
WI 84 Station Easting
WI 85 Station Northing
WI 86 Station Elevation
WI 87 Last rflector height used
WI 88 Instrument Height
Exit the program.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 45
IV
EL
AH
OH
RE
0ealigaretiea
Configuration Editor
RESEC\ CONFIGURATION 14:03
INFO DFLT EDIT
Log FlName : RESECT.LOG
M
C
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
Hz Ori Acc : 000'32"
Ht Acc TP : 0.025 m
Posn Acc TP : 0.025 m
Two Faces : NO
User Displ : NO
Log File : OFF
The "Configuration Editor" sets parameters for further
program operations:
Hz Ori Acc : Limit for the standard deviation of the
orientation. The orientation is
regarded as "error free", if the
computed standard deviation of the
orientation is within twice the entered
value.
Ht Acc TP : Height accuracy of the target points.
The entered value, is used as an "a
priori" accuracy in the calculation.
The height is regarded as "error free",
if the computed standard deviation is
within twice the entered value.
Start the "Configuration Editor" from the "STATION
DATA" dialog.
IV
EL
AH
OH
RE
46 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
Posn Acc TP : Position accuracy of the target points.
The entered value, is used as an "a
priori" accuracy in the calculation.
The position is regarded as "error
free", if the computed standard
deviation is within twice the entered
value.
Two Faces : YES for dual-face measurement,
NO for single-face.
Ben.Anzeige : YES; the measured value indication is
used from application "Measure and
record".
NO; the default indication is used for
the "Resection".
Log File : Set to ON, the program will record
measurement data in a log file as
described on page 47.
Log FlName : Enter the Log File Name.
Displays date and version.
Set the value to the default as described in dialog on
page 45.
Exit the program.
Store the current configuration and proceed to the
dialog "STATION DATA".
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 47
IV
EL
AH
OH
RE
Dual-face Measurement In the dual-face mode, the program will prompt for
measurements in both faces. When both measurements
are taken, the program will check the difference
between the two. If the difference in angle is within 27'
(0.5 gon) and the difference of two measured distances
is within 0.5 m (1.64 ft), the observations will be
averaged.
These tolerances are used to avoid errors in target
identification.
If exceeded an error message will be displayed.
Log File If "Log File" is set to "ON" the measurements and the
results are stored in the ASCII-file specified within the
"Configuration Editor". This file is created in the
directory LOG on the memory card. Subsequently, you
can read the memory card on your PC and obtain a hard
copy of the Log-file.
Data will always be appended to the specified Log-file.
The Log-file contains the following information:
Header The header line will contain the
program used, information about the
instrument, the name of the data file as
well as date and time.
Record For each measurement, a record will
be stored containing :
Station coordinates and orientation
correction, standard deviation for
Easting, Northing, Height of station
and orientation correction.
The residuals for horizontal angles,
heights and measured distances are
also listed.
IV
EL
AH
OH
RE
48 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
Leica VIP Resection V 2.10
Instrument : TCM1100, Serial 412160, (not named)
User templ. : User 1
Meas. file : FILE12.GSI
Program Start : 09/04/1996 at 12:52
Using Least-Squares Solution
Station no. : 2000
E= -0.0011m N= -0.0006m ELV= 398.3951m hi= 1.6000m
Ori.Corr. ; 24050'51"
S.Dev. East : 0.0003m
S.Dev. North : 0.0003m
S.Dev. Elev. : 0.0047m
S.Dev. Orient. : 000'49"
2 point(s) measured :
## Point no. Hz Height Distance Error Flag
1 500 -000'55" 0.0047m 0.0001m NONE
2 501 -000'18" -0.0047m 0.0002m NONE
Typical log file entry in the "Resection" program
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 49
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
TD
Tie 0isteace
latredactiea This manual describes the "Tie Distance" program of
the TPS SYSTEM 1000 theodolite series.
The program calculates the length and azimuth of a line
connecting two points.
Polygonal or Radial methods can be used as shown in
the illustrations.
The data for the points can either be measured or
retrieved from the selected file. Measured points and
points retrieved from the selected file can be used
together in the calculations, if the station coordinates
and orientation are set correctly.
In Polygonal Mode, the program will calculate the
distance between the last two points measured (eg. Pt3 -
Pt4).
N
P
R
O
G
_
Z
0
3
E
H
000'00"
Pt1
Pt2
E0
N0
Hz2
Hz3
Slope Dist 1
Slope Dist 3
Slope Dist 2
Hz1
Polygonal Mode
Pt3
Pt4
50 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
TD
In Radial Mode, the program will calculate the distance
between the last point measured (called a Radial Point)
(Pt2, Pt3 ...) and a fixed Center Point (Pt1).
E
H
N
P
R
O
G
_
Z
0
4
Pt1
Pt2
Pt3
Pt4
Slope Dist 2
Slope Dist 1
Slope Dist 3
Hz3
Hz2
Hz1
000'00"
Radial Mode
Toggling between Polygonal and Radial Mode at any
time while working is possible.
000'00"
E0
N0
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 51
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
TD
Neesare Nede
This dialog is used in accordance with the settings of
the system function "Measure & Record" or according
to the dialog shown below.
TIED\ FIRST POINT 14:03
ALL DIST REC TARGT IMPOR
Easting : ----- m
Northing : ----- m
Elevation : ----- m
M
C
Point no. : 546
Refl.Height : 1.654 m
Hz : 23045'23"
V : 452'35"
Slope Dist. : ----- m
Height diff : ----- m
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP CONF I<>II
The input for the start point is only possible after the
program start or with the function in the dialog
"RADIAL MODE".
For all following points the program requests (NEXT
POINT).
The dialog for the following points is identical with
dialog above, except for the title.
Simultaneously measure and record in the active file.
Proceed with the dialog "NEXT POINT". If the second
point has already been measured, the program will
proceed to the "RESULT" dialog.
Measure a distance. Record the measurement in the
active file and proceed with the dialog "NEXT
POINT". If the second point has already been
measured, the program will proceed to the "RESULT"
dialog.
Measure the distance. Accept the measurement without
recording. If the second point has already been
measured, the program will proceed with the
"RESULT" dialog.
52 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
TD
Enter the target data.
For further information refer to chapter "Measure &
Record" of "System" - user manual.
Import target coordinates.
For further information, please refer to chapter "Setup"
of "System" - user manual.
Start the "Configuration Editor".
Change the theodolite face.
Call up the CODE function, as described in chapter
"Measure & Record" of "System" - user manual.
Exit the program
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 53
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
TD
hesalts This dialog shows the results computed from the last
two points, which can be measured or retrieved from
the active file. The same results are calculated for both
methods.
Using "Polygon Mode" the calculations are always
based on the last two points, where as the "Radial
Mode" always uses the first point as a reference point.
Center Pt. : Point number of the center point
Radial Pt. : Point number of the radial point
Hori.Dist : Horizontal distance between the two
points
Azimuth : Azimuth from point 1 to point 2
Height : Height difference between point 1 and
point 2 (H
2
- H
1
).
Slope Dist : Slope distance between the two points
TIED\ RADIAL MODE 14:03
N.PKT N.ZEN STORE POLYG
Easting : 22.432 m
Northing : 50.083 m
M
C
Center Pt. : 12
Radial Pt. : 13
Hori.Dist. : 4.567 m
Azimuth : 34252'35"
Height : 2.543 m
Slope Dist. : 4.946 m
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
54 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
TD
Easting : Difference in Easting between point 1
and point 2 (E
2
- E
1
).
The grid coordinates are only valid for
oriented instruments set up on a
known point.
Northing : Difference Northing between point 1
and point 2 (N
2
- N
1
).
Note, the grid coordinates are only
relevant for oriented instruments set
up on a known point.
Return to the dialog "NEXT POINT" and measure the
next point.
Delete previous inputs. Proceed with the dialog "FIRST
POINT" to enter a new reference point. This function is
available for "RADIAL MODE" only.
Record the following results in the active file:
WI 11 Point number of point 2 or radial point
number
WI 25 Azimuth from point1 to point 2
WI 35 Horizontal distance
WI 37 Height difference between point 1 and
point 2
WI 39 Slope distance
WI 79 Point number of point 1 or center point
number
Toggle between Radial/Polygon Mode.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 55
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
TD
0ealigaretiea
Configuration Editor
Start the "Configuration Editor" from the "FIRST
POINT" dialog.
The "Configuration Editor" sets parameters for further
program operations:
Two Faces : Set YES for dual-face measurement,
NO for single-face.
User Disp. : YES to use the measurement display
set in the application "Measure &
Record".
Set NO to use the "Tie Distance"
default display.
Log File : Set to ON, the program will record
measurement data in the Log File
according to the format described on
page 57.
Log FlName : Enter the Log File Name.
TIED\ CONFIGURATION 14:03
INFO DFLT YES
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
Two Faces : NO
User Disp. : NO
Log File : OFF
Log FlName : TIEDIST.LOG
56 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
TD
Displays date and version of the running application.
Set the values to default. Default values are displayed in
dialog on page 55.
Exit the program.
Store the current configuration and proceed to the
dialog "MEASURE MODE".
Dual-face Measurement In the dual-face mode, the program will prompt for
measurements in both faces. When both measurements
are taken, the program will check the difference
between the two. If the difference in angle is within 27'
(0.5 gon)) and the difference of two measured distances
is within 0.5 m (1.64 ft), the observations will be
averaged. These tolerances are used to avoid errors in
target identification. If exceeded an error message will
be displayed.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 57
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
TD
Log File If "Log File" is set to ON the measurements and the
results are stored in the ASCII-file specified within the
"Configuration Editor". This file is created in the
directory LOG on the memory card. Subsequently, you
can read the memory card on your PC and obtain a hard
copy of the Log-file.
Data will always be appended to the specified Log-file.
The Log-file contains the following information:
Header The header line will contain the
program used, information about the
instrument, the name of the data file as
well as date and time.
Record For each measurement, a record will
be stored containing :
Point No 1, Point No. 2, Hori. Dist.,
Azimuth, Height, Slope Dist.
58 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
TD
Leica VIP Tie Distance V 2.10
Instrument : TCM1100, Serial 412160, (not named)
User Templ. : User 1
Meas. File : FILE12.GSI
Program Start : 09/04/1996 at 01:13
Station no. : 1151
E= 0.0000m N= 0.0000m ELV= 400.0000m hi= 0.0000m
Point No.1 : 1020
E= -31.2368m N= -0.2083m ELV= 400.0626m
Point No.2 : 1030
E= -30.5679m N= -17.8404m ELV= 403.1198m
Point no.1 : 1020
Point no.2 : 1030
Hori.Dist. : 17.6448m
Azimuth : 19758'40"
Height : 3.0572m
Slope dist. : 17.9077m
Point No.2 : 1040
E= -57.7040m N= -0.4265m H= 400.1028m
Point No. 1 : 1030
Point No.2 : 1040
Hori.Dist. : 32.2430m
Azimuth : 33632'14"
Height : -3.0170m
Slope dist. : 32.3839m
Typical log file entry in the "Tie Distance" program
(Polygonal Mode)
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 59
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
SO
Stekeeat
latredactiea This manual describes the "STAKEOUT" program of
the TPS SYSTEM 1000 theodolite series. The program
allows points with known coordinates to be placed in
the field.
"STAKEOUT" requires the instrument to be set up on
a known point with the instrument oriented. The station
point can be determined also with the programs "FREE
STATION" and "RESECTION".
The stakeout points can either be retrieved from the
selected file or entered manually.
The program permits selection of either 2D or 3D
stakeout modes.
Manually enter the stakeout point. The TPS 1000
manual input dialog will appear.
Initiate a search of the point in the database.
Allows program configuration.
or
Seercb Peiat The "SEARCH POINT" dialog informs about the active
recording device, the active file for data storage and the
present point/code.
STAKE\ SEARCH POINT 14:03
INPUT SEARC NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP CONF
M
C
Define stakeout point
Rec. device : Memory Card
Search in : FILE01.GSI
Pkt/Code : 4
60 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
SO
0eerse Pesitieaiag Once the coordinates of the stakeout point have been
acquired, the program proceeds to "Coarse
Positioning". This option is available to direct the prism
from the previous point placed to the next.
The "Coarse Positioning" calculates various
displacements, depending on the method selected.
Displacements are computed between the last point
placed and the actual stakeout point selected. For more
information refer to chapter "Stakeout".
Line Offset The stakeout values of each point are computed in
relation to the base formed by the last two points.
If the elevation is known for the point to be staked out,
the height difference in relation to the last base point
(Pt2), is displayed. In particular, this method is
advantageous for long objects (traffic routes). Values
for positioning are only displayed after two stakeout
points.
P
R
O
G
_
Z
0
5
N0
H
N
Pt1
Pt2
Line
Pt3 ... point to be staked
Height
E
Pt3
Offset
E0
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 61
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
SO
STAKE\ LINE OFFSET 14:03
STAKE
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP METHD PLOT
M
C
Target no. : CURB
Azimuth : 9010'02"
Hz : 9834'45"
Line : 4.105 m
Offset : 1.250 m
Height : 0.340 m
Target no : Number of the point to be staked.
Azimuth : Azimuth from the station to the point
to be staked.
Hz : Present theodolite direction. Note, if
the instrument is oriented and the
azimuth and Hz angle are
corresponding, the instrument is
pointing to the point to be staked.
Line : Distance along the line defined by the
last two points staked
Offset : Orthogonal offset from the defined
line
Height : Height difference from the last point
staked.
Proceed to "STAKEOUT". Motorized theodolites can
drive the telescope to the horizontal and vertical
direction of the point to be placed.
Change stakeout method. For more information refer to
chapter "Select Stakeout Method".
Generate a plot of the stakeout data. For more
information to chapter "Plot".
Exit the program.
or
62 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
SO
Orthogonal Setting out values are computed as orthogonal
coordinates to the baseline between instrument station
and prism. If the elevation is also known, H is given in
relation to the last prism - point measured.
Note, data will be displayed if there is at least one point
measured.
P
R
O
G
_
Z
0
6
E0
H
N
E
N0
Pt1
STAKE\ORTHOGONAL STAKE 14:03
STAKE
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP METHD PLOT
M
C
Target no. : CURB
Azimuth : 9010'02"
Hz : 9834'45"
L : 4.105 m
Q : 1.250 m
Height : 0.340 m
Target no. : Number of the point to be staked.
Azimuth : Azimuth from the station to the point
to be staked.
+

Q
L
H
point to be staked
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 63
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
SO
Hz Angle : Present theodolite direction. Note, if
the instrument is oriented and the
azimuth and Hz angle are
corresponding, the instrument is
pointing to the point to be staked.
L and Q in relation to the baseline:
last stakeout point - instrument station.
L : In-line distance L is positive for
points further than the last prism
position measured.
Q : Distance perpendicular to the
baseline. Q is positive for points on
the right of the baseline.
Height : Height difference from the last point
measured.
or
Proceed to "STAKEOUT". Motorized theodolites can
drive the telescope to the horizontal and vertical
direction of the point to be placed.
Change stakeout method.
For more information refer to chapter "Select Stakeout
Method".
Generate a plot of the stakeout data.
For more information to chapter "Plot".
Exit the program.
64 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
SO
Azimuth and Distance This method defines the point to be staked in terms of
the azimuth and distance from the theodolite station to
the point.
STAKE\AZIMUTH & DISTANCE 14:03
STAKE
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP METHD PLOT
M
C
Target no. : CURB
Azimuth : 9010'02"
Hz : 9834'45"
Slope Dist. : 4.105 m
Horiz.Dist. : 4.021 m
Height : 0.340 m
Target No. : Number of the point to be staked.
Azimuth : Azimuth from the station to the point
to be staked.
Hz : Present theodolite direction.
Note, if the instrument is oriented
and the azimuth and Hz angle are
corresponding, the instrument is
pointing to the point to be staked.
P
R
O
G
_
Z
0
7
H
N
E
E0
N0
000'00"
Azimuth
S
lo
p
e
D
is
t.
point to be
staked
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 65
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
SO
Slope Dist : Slope distance from the instrument
station to the stakeout point.
Horiz. Dist : Horizontal distance from the
instrument station to the stakeout
point.
Height : Height difference from the instrument
station to the stakeout point.
or
Proceed to "STAKEOUT". Motorized theodolites can
drive the telescope to the horizontal and vertical
direction of the point to be placed.
Change stakeout method.
For more information refer to chapter "Select Stakeout
Method".
Generate a plot of the stakeout data. For more
information to chapter "Plot".
Exit the program.
66 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
SO
Stekeeat Points must have known coordinates. Various methods
can be used, depending on the Stakeout Method set.
Motorized instruments can drive the telescope to the
horizontal and vertical direction of the point to be
staked. For more information refer to chapter "Select
Stakeout Method".
STAKE\ POLAR STAKEOUT 14:03
ALL DIST REC TARGT POSIT
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP METHD PLOT
M
C
Target no. : 0025
Hz : 9010'02"
Dist : 4.567 m
Height :FILL 0.102 m
Elevation : 32.543 m
Polar Stakeout After the first distance has been measured, the
differences between calculated and measured direction
and between calculated and measured horizontal
distance are displayed. If the elevation of the point to be
staked is available, the height difference between the
last measured reflector and the point to be staked is
shown together with the measured elevation of the
reflector point.
P
R
O
G
_
Z
0
8
E
E0
N0
H
N
H
Pt1
point to be staked
Hz
Dist
Values for Hz and D will be updated each time a new
distance is measured.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 67
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
SO
Target no. : Point number of the point to be
staked.
Hz : Difference in Hz circle reading
between the actual horizontal
direction and the calculated direction.
Dist : Difference in horizontal distance
between the measured and calculated
distance.
Height : Difference in height between the
measured reflector point and the
stakeout point, expressed both
numerically and as CUT/FILL.
Elevation : Elevation of the measured target point.
Simultaneously measure and record data on the active
recording device.
Measure a distance.
Record the measurement on the active recording device.
Enter target data as described in chapter "Measure &
Record" of "System" - user manual.
Re-position the telescope on the target. Note, this
function is only available for motorized theodolites.
Change stakeout method. For more information refer to
chapter "Select Stakeout Method".
Generate a plot of the stakeout data. For more
information refer to chapter "Plot".
Exit the program.
Acquire the next point to stake.
68 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
SO
Orthogonal Stakeout Orthogonal offsets are computed using the baseline
between the last measured point and the instrument
station.
After the first distance measurement, the transverse and
longitudinal differences are displayed. If the elevation
of the stakeout point is available, the height difference
between the measured reflector and the point to be
staked is shown, and also the measured elevation of the
reflector point.
Target no. : Point number of the point to be
staked.
Q : Transversal displacement of the
reflector. Positive in sign if point is
right.
STAKE\ORTHOGONAL STAKE 14:03
ALL DIST REC TARGT POSIT
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP METHD PLOT
M
C
Target no. : CURB
Q : 0.012 m
D : 4.567 m
Height :FILL 0.102 m
Elevation : 32.543 m
P
R
O
G
_
Z
0
9
H
E
N0
N
E0 H
Pt1
D
Q
Values for Q and D will be updated each time a new
distance is measured.
point to be staked
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 69
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
SO
D : Longitudinal displacement of the
reflector. Positive in sign if stakeout
point is further away from station.
Height : Difference in height between
measured reflector point and the
stakeout point. Positive in sign if
stakeout point is higher than the
reflector position.
Elevation : Elevation of the measured reflector
point.
Simultaneously measure and record data on the active
recording device.
Measure a distance.
Record the measurement on the active recording device.
Enter target data as described in chapter "Measure &
Record" of "System" - user manual.
Re-position the telescope on the target. Note, this
function is only available for motorized theodolites.
Change stakeout method. For more information refer to
chapter "Select Stakeout Method".
Generate a plot of the stakeout data. For more
information refer to chapter "Plot".
Exit the program.
Acquire the next point to stake.
70 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
SO
Stakeout with auxiliary
points
The stakeout method computes values for points which
cannot be sighted directly.
Measure to the auxiliary point Pt1. The distance "Dist
1" and angle "Hz angle 1" to the stakeout point are
computed. Likewise proceed for auxiliary point Pt2.
The stakeout point can be set out using the 2 calculated
distances and/or angles from auxiliary points Pt1 and
Pt2.
The program automatically updates both distance and
angle values whenever a new point is measured. The
previous point Pt2 becomes Pt1 and the new point Pt
becomes Pt2.
Note, the auxiliary point to be measured will be marked
with an asterisk (*).
STAKE\ AUXILIARY POINTS 14:03
ALL DIST REC TARGT POSIT
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP METHD PLOT
M
C
Target no. : CURB
Hz Angle 1 :* 9001'02"
Dist 1 :* 4.567 m
Hz Angle 2 : 15022'34"
Dist 2 : 2.973 m
Height :CUT -0.102 m
P
R
O
G
_
Z
1
0
E
N0
Hz2
H N
E0
Dist1
Pt1
Pt2
Dist2
Hz1
point to be
staked
Target no : Point number of the point to be
staked.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 71
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
SO
Hz Angle 1 : Angle from the first auxiliary point to
the stakeout point.
Dist 1 : Distance from the first auxiliary point
to the stakeout point.
Hz Angle 2 : Angle from the second auxiliary point
to the stakeout point.
Dist 2 : Distance from the second auxiliary
point to the stakeout point.
Height : Difference in height between the last
measured reflector point and the
stakeout point. Positive in sign if
stakeout point is higher than the
reflector position.
Simultaneously measure and record data on the active
recording device.
Measure a distance.
Record the measurement on the active recording device.
Enter target data as described in chapter "Measure &
Record" of "System" - user manual.
Re-position the telescope on the target. Note, this
function is only available for motorized theodolites.
Change stakeout method. For more information refer to
chapter "Select Stakeout Method".
Generate a plot of the stakeout data. For more
information refer to chapter "Plot".
Exit the program.
Acquire the next point to stake.
72 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
SO
Stakeout from Coordinate
Differences
After the first distance measurement, the displacements
along the grid coordinate axes are displayed. If the
elevation of the point to be staked is available, the
height difference between the measured reflector and
the stakeout point is shown as well as the measured
elevation of the reflector point.
Target no. : Point number of the point to be
staked.
Easting : Displacement of the reflector along
the East-coordinate axis.
Northing : Displacement of the reflector along
the North-coordinate axis.
P
R
O
G
_
Z
1
1
N0
E0
E
H N
Pt1
H
point to be
staked
Easting
Northing
STAKE\ GRID COORDINATES 14:03
ALL DIST REC TARGT POSIT
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP METHD PLOT
M
C
Target no. : Ta0025
Easting : 0.101 m
Northing : 0.567 m
Height : CUT -0.102 m
Elevation : 32.543 m
Values for E and N will be updated each time a new
distance is measured.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 73
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
SO
Height : Difference in height between the
measured reflector point and the
stakeout point. Positive in sign if
stakeout point is higher than the
reflector position.
Elevation : Elevation of the measured reflector
point.
Simultaneously measure and record data on the active
recording device.
Measure a distance.
Record the measurement on the active recording device.
Enter target data as described in chapter "Measure &
Record" of "System" - user manual.
Re-position the telescope on the target. Note, this
function is only available for motorized theodolites.
Change stakeout method. For more information refer to
chapter "Select Stakeout Method".
Generate a plot of the stakeout data. For more
information refer to chapter "Plot".
Exit the program.
Acquire the next point to stake.
74 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
SO
Select Stekeeat Netbed
Select the stakeout method in any stakeout dialog.
STAKE\ SELECT METHOD 14:03
POLAR ORTHO AUX GRID LIST
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
Coarse Meth : LINE OFFSET
Stakeout M. :POLAR STAKEOUT
3D Stakeout. : ON
Position : 2D
Hght. Shift : 0.000 m
Coarse Meth :
Select the method for "COARSE POSITIONING":
NONE no static method used
LINE OFFSET see chapter "Line Offset"
ORTHOGONAL see chapter "Orthogonal"
AZIMUTH & DISTAN see chapter "Azimuth and
Distance"
Choosing NONE, the program will automatically
proceed to the selected "STAKEOUT METHOD" and
bypass the "COARSE POSITIONING" method after
you selected a new stakeout point.
Stakeout M. :
Select the method for "STAKEOUT":
POLAR STAKEOUT see chapter "Polar
Stakeout"
ORTHOGONAL STAKE see chapter "Orthogonal
Stakeout"
AUXILIARY POINTS see chapter "Stakeout with
auxiliary points"
GRID COORDINATES see chapter "Stakeout from
Coordinate Differences"
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 75
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
SO
3D Stakeout : ON for 3D stakeout,
OFF for 2D stakeout.
Position : Select positioning method. (Motorized
instruments only):
Off Automatic positioning off
2D Positioning of the horizontal
drive
3D Positioning vertical and
horizontal drive
Hght. Shift : All heights are changed by this
amount. The value can be changed
only when you are in this dialog.
Plet
A plot is generated of the stakeout situation with a list
of the numeric values, corresponding to the
"STAKEOUT METHOD".
Note, below a typical plot is shown using the coordinate
"STAKEOUT METHOD".
STAKE\ PLOT 14:03
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
E PS
N
R
E : 0.024 m
N : 0.012 m
76 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
SO
0ealigaretiea
STAKE\ CONFIGURATION 14:03
INFO DFLT OFF
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
Start the "Configuration Editor" from the "SEARCH
POINT" dialog.
3D Stake : ON
Log File : OFF
Log FlName : STAKEOUT.LOG
The "Configuration Editor" sets parameters for further
program operations:
3D Stake : ON for 3-dimensional stakeout.
Note the program will not perform 3D
stakeout if no elevation is available
for the point to be staked.
OFF for 2-dimensional stakeout.
Note that there will be no difference in
height displayed.
Log File : OFF no recording in a Log file
SHORT reduce recording in a Log
file
LONG detailed recording in a Log
file
Display software-version
Set the value to default. (3D stake = ON) .
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 77
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
SO
Exit the program.
Store the current configuration and proceed to the
dialog "SEARCH POINT".
Log File If "Log File" is set to "ON" the measurements and the
results are stored in the ASCII-file specified within the
"Configuration Editor". This file is created in the
directory LOG on the memory card. Subsequently, you
can read the memory card on your PC and obtain a hard
copy of the Log-file.
Data will always be appended to the specified Log-file.
The Log-file contains the following information:
Header The header line will contain the
program used, information about the
instrument, the name of the data file as
well as date and time.
Record SHORT recording of design
coordinates, setout height and height
difference in the log file.
LONG recording of design
coordinates, setout coordinates und
differences of coordinates in the log
file.
78 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
SO
Leica VIP Stakeout V 2.10
Instrument : TCM1100, Serial 412160, (not named)
User templ. : User 1
Meas. file : FILE12.GSI
Program Start : 09/04/1996 at 01:18
Station no. : 3000
E= 21.016m N= 64.666m ELV= 420.467m hi= 1.700m
Point no. : 1152, Hght. Shift = 0.000m
Design : E= 21.602m N= 62.184m ELV= 420.115m
Staked : E= 21.606m N= 62.166m ELV= 420.355m hr= 1.500m
Deltas : dO= -0.004m dN= 0.018m dELV= -0.240m
Typical log file entry in the "STAKEOUT" program
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 79
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
lree Stetiea
latredactiea This manual describes the "FREE STATION" program
of the TPS SYSTEM 1000 theodolite series.
E
H
E0
P
R
O
G
_
Z
1
9
N
Pt1
Pt2
Pt3
N0
This program can be used to deduce the three-dimensio-
nal coordinates for the instrument station and the
horizontal orientation of the from measurements to a
maximum of 10 target points.
For simultaneous determination of the station elevation,
height of instrument and height of reflector must
already have been input and the elevation of the target
points must be known.
The program allows measurement in single or dual-face
mode.
Directions to target points can be determined, as can
any combination of direction and distance. To compute
the position coordinates, at least three elements (2
directions and 1 distance) are necessary.
80 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
Stetiea 0ete Enter station point number and height of the instrument.
FREST\ STATION DATA 14:03
NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP CONF
M
C
Station no. : 1
Inst.Height : 1.555 m
Proceed to define the target points.
Start the "CONFIGURATION"
Alpha-numerical/numerical input.
Terget Peiat
Enter the target point number and height of the
reflector.
FREST\ TARGET POINT 14:03
CALC LIST <-- --> NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
Station no. : 1
Refl.Height: 1.555 m
Run the calculation. Note, the key will be
assigned after sufficient measurements were taken to
calculate a position.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 81
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
Entry of target points into a list as well as selecting
points for further use.
Displays the previous point from the list of points you
entered. Note that this key will not be available until
there is at least one point in the list.
Displays the next point in the list of points you entered.
Note that this key will not be available until there is at
least one point in the list.
Retrieve the coordinates of the target point from the
active file. For further information, please refer to
dialog "IMPORT" described in the "SYSTEM" - user
manual.
Alpha-numerical/numerical input.
Point List Enter a maximum of 10 points. The same point can be
retrieved several times.
The same point number can be used several times
without new input.
Return to the dialog "Target Point".
FREST\ POINT LIST 14:03
Point 7 TAR07
Point 8 TAR08
Point 9 TAR09
Point10 TAR10
M
C
Point 1 TAR01
Point 2 TAR02
Point 3 TAR03
Point 4 TAR04
Point 5 TAR05
Point 6 TAR06
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
82 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
Neesare Nede This dialog is similar to the TPS System 1000s basic
"MEASURE MODE" dialog. Once a measurement is
taken, the program will return to the dialog "DEFINE
POINT" to acquire the next point for measuring.
If the station coordinates can be calculated successfully
from the first few measurements, the Hz and V
values are displayed for further entered target points.
Motorized theodolites will automatically drive the
telescope to the target point.
Simultaneously measure and record data on the active
recording device. Return to the dialog "TARGET
POINT".
Measure a distance.
Record the measurement on the active recording device.
Return to the dialog "TARGET POINT".
Enter target data. For further information, please refer
to chapter "Measure & Record" described in the
"System" - user manual.
Change the theodolite face.
Call up the CODE function, as described in chapter
"Measure & Record" described in the "System" - user
manual.
Exit the program.
Accept the measurement and return to the dialog
"TARGET POINT".
FREST\MEASURRE MODE (GSI)14:03
ALL DIST REC TARGT
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
Point no. : 12
Hz : 28655'50"
V : 9116'20"
Refl.Height : 1.500 m
Slope Dist. : 22.039 m
Hz : -----
HELP I<>II
M
C
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 83
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
0elcaletiea
Calculates the 3D station coordinates and orientation as
well as the standard deviation of the results.
FREST\ RESULTS <L.SQRS> 14:03
SET STORE PLOT MORE
Orientation : 212'34"
Easting : 0.003 m
Northing : 0.005 m
Elevation : 0.005 m
Orient : 000'03"
Calc Scale : YES
Scale : 0.999956
M
C
Station no. : 1
No. of Pts : 6
Inst.Height : 1.635 m
Easting : 2134.234 m
Northing : 4231.365 m
Elevation : 580.643 m
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP ROBST
Station no : Point number assigned to the station
No. of Pts : Number of points measured
Inst.Height : Instrument Height
Easting : Calculated Easting for the station
Northing : Calculated Northing for the station
Elevation : Calculated Elevation for the station
Orientation : Oriented direction
Easting : Standard deviation of Easting
Northing : Standard deviation of Northing
Elevation : Standard deviation of the Elevation
84 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
Orient : Standard deviation of the Orientation
Calc Scale : YES scale factor is calculated,
NO scale factor is not calculated
Scale : The scale factor of the free station
calculation.
Note that the scale is not shown if
set to NO.
Set orientation and station coordinates on the
instrument. Note that this key will end the program.
Record the following results on the active recording
device:
WI 11 Station Point Number
WI 25 Orientation correction
WI 84 Station Easting
WI 85 Station Northing
WI 86 Station Elevation
WI 87 Last reflector height used
WI 88 Instrument Height
Sketch of the station and the reference points used.
Show the results of individual measurements on the
screen (see dialog "More Information").
Measure more points. The program will recall the
"TARGET POINT" dialog.
Select between the "Robust" method and the "Variati-
on" method
Exit the program.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 85
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
More Information Display the residuals of individual measurements. You
can also disable points from the calculation of position
or height as well as delete erroneous measured points.
FREST\MEHR INFORMATIONEN 14:03
RECLC <-- --> MEAS DEL NO
Height : 0.020 m
Refl.Height : 1.555 m
Easting : 991.427 m
Northing : 1995.162 m
Elevation : 402.466 m
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
9/10 : Sequence number of the current point
and total number of points in the
measurement set. The scroll bar shows
the sequential position of the
measurements, graphically.
Use for Ht. : Use this measurement for height
determination (YES/NO)
Status : Use this measurement for calculation
(ON/OFF).
Point no : The target point number.
Error Flag : Identified erroneous measurements.
Possible values are:
NONE measurement is OK
HZ horizontal angle error
DIST distance error
HT height difference error
The flags may also be combined, i.e.
DIST + HZ
M
C
9/10
Use for Ht :YES Status: ON
Point no. : 12
Error Flag : NONE
Hz : 000'03"
Distance : 0.050 m
86 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
Hz. : Difference between calculated and
measured Hz. angle
Distance : Difference between calculated and
measured distance
Height : Difference between calculated and
measured height
Refl. Ht. : Reflector height used for that target
point
Easting, Northing, Elevation : Target coordinates
used.
Recalculate the result.
Scroll to the measurements of the previous point.
Scroll to the measurements of the following point.
Measure more point. Return to dialog "TARGET
POINT".
Delete a point from the set of measurements . You can
now measure a new point in its place.
Exit the program.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 87
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
Plet
Generates a plot showing the measurement
configuration. The station point is in the center and the
top of the sketch shows the direction of Grid north. The
sketch is true in angular but not true in distances. Points
are numbered sequentially in the order in which they
were measured. Points not used in the calculation are
marked with a dotted line.
FREST\ PLOT 14:03
RECLC MEAS
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
Recalculate the solution and return to the dialog
"CALCULATION RESULTS" (see page 83).
Measure more points. The program will recall the
"TARGET POINT" dialog. (see page 80).
Toggle any point ON or OFF by pressing the numeric
key corresponding to the sequence number of the point.
Note, that represents point 10.
...
1
5
4
3
2
88 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
FREST\ CONFIGURATION 14:03
Log FlName : FREE_STA.LOG
M
C
Hz Ori Acc : 000'32"
Ht Acc TP : 0.0250 m
Posn Acc TP : 0.0250 m
Two Faces : NO
User Displ. : NO
Log File : OFF
INFO DFLT EDIT
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP I<>II
The "Configuration Editor" sets parameters for further
program operations:
Hz Ori Acc : Limit for the standard deviation of the
orientation. The orientation is
regarded as "error free", if the
computed standard deviation of the
orientation is within twice the entered
value.
Ht Acc TP : Height accuracy of the target points.
The entered value, is used as an "a
priori" accuracy in the calculation.
The height is regarded as "error free",
if the computed standard deviation is
within twice the entered value.
0ealigaretiea
Configuration Editor
Start the "Configuration Editor" from the "STATION
DATA" dialog.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 89
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
Posn Acc TP : Position accuracy of the target points.
The entered value, is used as an "a
priori" accuracy in the calculation.
The position is regarded as "error
free", if the computed standard
deviation is within twice the entered
value.
Two Faces : YES for dual-face measurement,
NO for single-face.
User Disp : YES; the measured value indication is
used from application "Measure and
record".
NO; the default indication is used for
the "Free Station".
Log File : ON, records measurements in a Log-
File.The format is described on page
90.
Log FlName : Enter the Log File Name
Display software-version
Set the values to default. Default values are shown in
the previous dialog.
Exit the program.
Store the current configuration and proceed to the
dialog "STATION DATA".
90 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
Dual-face Measurement In the dual-face mode, the program will prompt for
measurements in both faces. When both measurements
are taken, the program will check the difference
between the two. If the difference in angle is within 27'
(0.5 gon) and the difference of two measured distances
is within 0.5 m (1.64 ft), the observations will be
averaged. These tolerances are used to avoid errors in
target identification. If exceeded an error message will
be displayed.
Data will always be appended to the specified Log-file.
The Log-file contains the following information:
Header The header line will contain the
program used, information about the
instrument, the name of the data file as
well as date and time.
Record For each measurement, a record will
be stored containing :
- Station coordinates and
- orientation correction,
- standard deviations for
Easting,
Northing,
Height of station
and orientation correction.
Log File If "Log File" is set to ON the measurements and the
results are stored in the ASCII-file specified within the
"Configuration Editor". This file is created in the
directory LOG on the memory card. Subsequently, you
can read the memory card on your PC and obtain a hard
copy of the Log-file.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 91
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
The residuals for
- horizontal angles,
- heights and
- measured distances
are also listed.
Leica VIP Free Station V 2.10
Instrument : TCM1800, Serial 410000, (not named)
User templ. : User 1
Meas. file : FILE01.GSI
Program Start : 02/05/1996 at 11:23
Using Least-Squares Solution
Station no. : 200
E= -3.5461m N= -0.7683m ELV= -0.6518m hi= 0.0000m
Ori.Corr. : 000'20"
S.Dev. East : 0.0003m
S.Dev. North : 0.0003m
S.Dev. Elev. : 0.0015m
S.Dev. Orient. : 0"00'02"
4 point(s) measured :
## Point no. d Hz d Height d Distance Error Flag
1 109 001'21" 0.0012m -0.0000m NONE
2 110 -000'00" -0.0045m -0.0002m NONE
3 112 -000'25" 0.0018m 0.0010m NONE
4 113 000'48" 0.0014m -0.0002m NONE
Continued next page
92 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
Using Robust Solution
Station no. : 200
E= -3.5461m N= -0.7683m ELV= -0.6518m hi= 0.0000m
Ori.Corr. : 000'20"
S.Dev. East : 0.0003m
S.Dev. North : 0.0003m
S.Dev. Elev. : 0.0015m
S.Dev. Orient. : 000'02"
4 point(s) measured :
## Point no. d Hz d Height d Distance Error Flag
1 109 001'21" 0.0012m -0.0000m NONE
2 110 -000'00" -0.0045m -0.0002m NONE
3 112 -000'25" 0.0018m 0.0010m NONE
4 113 000'48" 0.0014m -0.0002m NONE
Typical log file entry in the "FREE STATION" program
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 93
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
RL
helereace liae
latredactiea This manual describes the "REFERENCE LINE"
program of the TPS SYSTEM 1000 theodolite series.
The distance and the angle between two points is
calculated by the program.
"REFERENCE LINE" is a specialized form of stakeout
used for construction and building alignment. It permits
positioning of a point referred to a line. Points for use in
the program can be measured, entered manually, or read
from the database.
The program records individual measurements in the
database. In addition, the program generates a log file
containing all data for a given measurement session.
H N
Target pt
P
R
O
G
_
Z
1
2
Offset
E

Pt1
Pt2
B
a
se
lin
e
Offset
Line
Line
Ref.line
94 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
RL
The program also allows to determine various values of
height determination as shown in the figure below.
FP Point of intersection of vertical with
line P1-P2
NP Point of intersection with line P1- P2
of perpendicular to P1- P2
H1 Height difference to start of line P1
H2 Height differencein relation to the
interpolated height FP of reference
line P1-P2.
Line Horizontal distance from P1 to FP
(abscissa)
Spat.dist Spatial distance from P1 to NP
Perp.l Length of perpendicular from Target
point to Reference line
P
R
O
G
_
Z
1
2
H1 H2
Offset
Line
P2
P1
FP

S
p
a
t.d
ist
NP
Target point
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 95
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
RL
8eseliae Peiats
Determine Base Points This dialog defines the two points of the baseline. You
can either manually enter, measure or search for the
point in the database.
REFLN\ REFERENCE LINE 14:03
INPUT MEAS SEARC NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP CONF
M
C
1. POINT BASELINE
Rec. device : MEMORY-CARD
Search in : FILE01.GSI
Point/Code : 58
Manually enter the first base point. The TPS 1000
manual input dialog will appear.
Proceed to determine the base point by a measurement.
Initiate a search of the point in the database.
Start the "Configuration Editor".
Exit the program.
or
96 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
RL
Measure a Base Point This dialog is used in accordance with the settings of
the system function "Measure & Record" or according
to the dialog shown below.
Simultaneously measure and record in the active file.
Proceed with the dialog "1 POINT BASELINE" (page
95). If the second point has already been measured, the
program will proceed to the "DEFINE REF LINE"
dialog.
Measure a distance.
Record the measurement in the active file and proceed
with the dialog "1 POINT BASELINE" (page 95). If
the second point has already been measured, the
program will proceed to the "DEFINE REF LINE"
dialog.
Measure the distance. Accept the measurement without
recording. If the second point has already been
measured, the program will proceed with the "DEFINE
REF LINE" dialog.
Enter the target data. For further information refer to
chapter "Measure & Record" of "SYSTEM" - user
manual.
REFLN\ REFERENCE LINE 14:03
ALL DIST REC TARGT
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
Puoint no. : 12
Hz : 28655'50"
V : 9116'20"
Refl.Height : 1.500 m
Slope Dist. : 22.039 m
Height diff : 2.543 m
HELP I<>II
M
C
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 97
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
RL
Change the theodolite face.
Call up the CODE function, as described in chapter
"Measure & Record" of "SYSTEM" - user manual.
Exit the program.
98 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
RL
0eliae helereace liae The reference line can be defined by entering a distance
value, a line offset value and an angle value for the base
line. Heights can be changed by a constant rate (eg, 1m)
by entering a H offset value.
REFLN\ DEFINE REF LINE 14:03
NEWL MEAS
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
1.BasePoint : 12
2.BasePoint : 13
Offset : 1.000 m
Line : 1.558 m
Alpha : 203'39"
H Offset : 0.500 m
1.BasePoint : The first base point that defines the
base line.
2.BasePoint : The second base point that defines the
base line.
Offset : Establishes the displacement parallel
to the base line.
Line : Establishes the distance from the first
reference point to the starting point of
the new reference line.
Alpha : Establishes the angle between the base
line and the new reference line.
H Offset : Displaces the base line parallel in
height.
Define a new base line.
Accept parameters as displayed and proceed to the
"RESULT REF LINE" dialog.
or
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 99
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
RL
hesalts helereace liae
The "RESULTS REF LINE" dialog displays the data of
the measured point refering to the reference line, as
shown in dialog below:
Point No. : The point number of the stakeout
point.
Offset : The delta value of line Offset in
reference to the stakeout point.
(ordinate)
Line : The delta value of Line in reference
to the stakeout point. (abscissa)
H : Height difference between the
stakeout point as measured and the
height reference point.
Perp.lngth. : Length of perpendicular
Spat.dist. : Spatial distance
Elevation : Height of target point.
REFLN\RESLUTS REF LINE 14:03
ALL DIST REC TAGT
Point no. : 12
Offset : 0.020 m
Line : 1.468 m
H : -0.558 m
Perp.lngth : 0.039 m
Spat. dist : 3.020 m
M
C
Elevation : 103.020 m
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
If "Offset" is brought to "0" by turning the instrument,
a distance measurement must always be carried out for
control purpose.
100 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
RL
Simultaneously execute distance measurement and
record the measurement.
Measure a distance.
Record the measurement in the database.
Depending on the setting in the "Configuration" dialog
a measurement block containing delta values is
recorded:
WI 11 Point Number of target
WI 35 Offset
WI 37 H
WI 39 Line
or
WI 11 Point Number of target
WI 35 Offset
WI 37 Perpendicular
WI 39 Spatial distance
Depending on the setting in the "Configuration" dialog
a record is written in the log file.
When finished, the program will proceed the "DEFINE
REF LINE" dialog.
Enter target data as described in the Measure & Record
of the System Manual.
Exit the program.
Proceed with dialog "DEFINE REF LINE".
Call up the CODE function, as described in chapter
"Measure & Record" of "SYSTEM" - user manual.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 101
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
RL
0ealigaretiea
Configuration Editor
Start the "Configuration Editor" from the "1. POINT
BASELINE" dialog.
REFLN\ CONFIGURATION 14:03
INFO DFLT OFF
Offset : ON
Line / : OFF
H.Offset. : OFF
Rec Diff : NONE
User Disp : NO
Height : Ref
M
C
Log File : OFF
Log FlName : REFLINE.LOG
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
The "Configuration Editor" lets you change and set the
following parameters that determine program operation:
Offset : Set to ON, the program will allow the
input of an offset from the reference
line.
Line / : Set to ON, the program will allow the
input of a distance from the first base
point to the starting point of the new
reference line, and also an angle
between the base line and the new
reference line .
H Offset : Set to ON, the program will allow the
input of a height offset.
S
102 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
RL
Rec Diff : Set to NONE, no additional
measurement is recorded.
Set to O the program will record
Offset values only.
Set to O/ L, the program will record
both Offset and Line values.
Set to O/L/H, the program will record
Offset, D Line and Height of target
values.
If the option "Height" is set to
"Inter" you can in addition calculate
the values:
Set to O/S the program will record
both Offset and Spatial distance
values.
Set to O/S/P, the program will record
Offset, Spatial distance and
Perp.length of the perpendicular line.
(Refer to figure page 94)
User Disp : Set to YES, the display defined in the
MEAS application will be used.
If set to NO, the "REFERENCE
LINE" default display applies.
Height : Set to Ref, Height (1) will be
calculated from the first base point
and the reflector.
Set to Inter, the program will
calculate Height (2) from the
interpolated height of the base line at
Line of the reflector position and
the reflector position itself.
If set to Inter, the Line / a option is
set to NO automatically.
Log File : Set to ON, the program will record
measurement data in a log file in the
format described on page 103.
Log FlName : Enter the Log File Name.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 103
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
RL
Log File If "Log File" is set to ON the measurements and the
results are stored in the ASCII-file specified within the
"Configuration Editor". This file is created in the
directory LOG on the memory card. Subsequently, you
can read the memory card on your PC and obtain a hard
copy of the Log-file.
Data will always be appended to the specified Log-file.
The Log-file contains the following information:
Header The header line will contain the
program used, information about the
instrument, the name of the data file as
well as dateand time.
Configuration each modification of baseline and
reference line is stored.
Record For each measurement, a record will
be stored containing: Point No., as-
staked Easting, Northing, and
Elevation and their delta values.
Displays date and version of the running application.
Press to reset configuration parameters to their default
values. Default settings are shown in the previous
dialog.
Store the current configuration and proceed with dialog
"1. POINT BASELINE".
Key to choose the different functions.
104 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
RL
Leica VIP Reference Line V 2.10
Instrument : TCM1100, Serial 430000, Joes theodolite
User Templ. : User 1
Meas. File : FILE01.GSI
Program Start : 02/23/1995 at 13:00
Station no. : Stationpointnumber
E=1000.000m N=2000.000m H=400.000m hi=1.1150m
1.BasePoint : Baselinepointnumber
E=1050.000m N=2050.000m H=410.000m
2.BasePoint : Baselinepointnumber
E=1060.000m N=2060.000m H=420.000m
Offset. : 1.0000m
Line : 2.6700m
Alpha : 7245'66"
H Offset : 1.0000m
Height : REF
Point no. : 1025
E=1055.000m N=2055.000m H=415.000m hr=1.1150m
Deltas : dP= 4.3403m
: dL= 3.0907m
: dH= -1.5027m
Typical log file entry in the "REFERENCE LINE" program
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 105
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
RH
hemete heigbt
latredactiea This manual describes the "Remote Height" program of
the TPS System 1000 theodolite series. The distance
and the angle between two points is calculated by the
program.
The elevation of a remote height point is calculated
from the zenith angle to the target and from the
measured distance to a reflector situated vertically
below or above that target.
To ensure correct results, the target and the reflector
must be lined up vertically. In practice it is not generally
possible to maintain an exactly-vertical line, and so you
must decide what lateral deviation can be tolerated. The
horizontal distance to the inaccessible target must
however coincide with the horizontal distance to the
reflector.
When the instrument is aligned and the station
coordinates have been set, the position coordinates of
the remote height can be calculated and stored in the
data file.
E
P
R
O
G
_
Z
1
3
H
E0
H N
N0
V
106 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
RH
Neesare 8ese Peiat This dialog is used in accordance with the settings of
the system function "Measure & Record" or according
to the dialog shown below.
REMHT\ MEASURE BASE PT 14:03
ALL DIST REC TARGT REMOT NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
Point no. : Station12
Hz : 1655'50"
V : 9116'20"
Refl.Height : 1.664 m
Slope Dist. : ----- m
Height diff : -----
HELP CONF I<>II
Point No. : The point number of the base point.
Hz : Horizontal direction from the remote
point to the base point.
V : Vertical angle to the remote point.
Refl.Height : Reflector height used for the target
point.
Slope dist. : Slope distance from the instrument
station to the base point.
Height diff : Height difference between the base
point ground and the instrument
ground.
Simultaneously measure and record in the active file.
Proceed with the "REMOTE POINT" dialog.
Measure a distance. Record the measurement in the
active file and proceed with the "REMOTE POINT"
dialog.
Measure the distance. Accept the measurement without
recording. Proceed with the "REMOTE POINT" dialog.
M
C
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 107
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
RH
Enter the target data. . For further information refer to
chapter "Measure & Record" of the "SYSTEM" - user
manual.
Proceed with "REMOTE POINT" dialog.
Start the "Configuration Editor".
Change the theodolite face.
Call up the CODE function, as described in chapter
"Measure & Record" of the "SYSTEM" - user manual.
Exit the program.
Alpha-numerical/numerical input.
108 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
RH
Neesare hemete Peiat
Once the base point has been measured, this dialog
shows the position of the point - above or below the
base point - aimed with the telescope. The data are
immediately updated while turning the instrument.
REMHT\ MEASURRE REMOTE PT14:03
Northing : 124.003 m
Elevation : 768.005 m
M
C
Point no. : Station12
Hz : 1655'50"
V : 9116'20"
Slope Dist. : 23.345 m
Hgt diff : 6.435 m
Easting : 3453.998 m
STORE TARGT BASE
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP I<>II
Point No. : The point number of the remote point.
Hz : Horizontal direction from the
instrument to the remote point.
V : Vertical angle to the remote point.
Slope dist. : Slope distance from the instrument
station to the remote point.
(calculated)
Hgt diff : Height difference between the remote
point and the base point ground.
Easting : Calculated Easting (Y) for the remote
point.
Northing : Calculated Northing (X) for the
remote point.
Elevation : Calculated Elevation for the remote
point.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 109
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
RH
Record the measurement in the database.
Enter the target data. . For further information refer to
chapter "Measure & Record" of the "SYSTEM" - user
manual.
Return to the "MEASURE BASE POINT" dialog.
Call up the CODE function, as described in chapter
"Measure & Record" of the "SYSTEM" - user manual.
Return to the "MEASURE BASE POINT" dialog.
Exit the program.
110 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
RH
Start the "Configuration Editor" from the "MEASURE
REMOTE POINT" dialog.
REMHT\ CONFIGURATION 14:03
INFO DFLT YES
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
User Displ : NO
Hor.Pos.Tol : 0.200 m
Rec H WI37 : OFF
The "Configuration Editor" sets parameters for further
program operations:
User Disp : Set to YES, the display defined in the
"MEAS" application will be used.
If set to NO, the "REMOTE
HEIGHT" default display applies.
Hor.Pos.Tol : Horizontal distance tolerance that
valid point measurements cannot
exceed.
Rec H WI37:Set to ON, the program will store
height difference as record WI37 in
the database.
0ealigaretiea
Displays date and version of the running application.
Reset configuration parameters to their default values.
Default settings are shown in dialog above.
Accept the current configuration and proceed to the
dialog "MEASURE BASE PT".
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 111
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
HP
hiddea Peiat
latredactiea This manual describes the "HIDDEN POINT" program
of the TPS SYSTEM 1000 instruments.
The program allows measurements to a point that is not
directly visible using a special hidden-point rod. The
data for the hidden point are calculated from
measurements to the prisms mounted on the pole with a
known spacing and a known length of pole. The pole
still may be kept slope.
"Measurements" are calculated as if the hidden point
was observed directly. These "calculated
measurements" can also be recorded.
The hidden-point rod can have either two or three
reflectors. The rod you are using is defined in the
"CONFIGURATION" of the program. Here, you enter
the length of the rod, spacing between reflectors, and
the prism constant. Refer to Figure on page 112, which
illustrates a hidden-point rod with three reflectors.
If the hidden-point rod you are using has three
reflectors, the program calculates coordinates for the
hidden point from three combinations:
Reflector 1 + Reflector 2
Reflector 3 + Reflector 2
Reflector 1 + Reflector 3
In the case of motorized theodolites, you can configure
the program in such a way, that it points the telescope at
the third reflector automatically after the first two
reflectors have been measured.
112 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
HP
E
P
R
O
G
_
Z
1
4
H N
N0
E0
R1-R2
R1-R3
Start the "Configuration Editor" from the "MEASURE"
dialog.
HDNPT\ CONFIGURATION 14:03
INFO DFLT YES
M
C
User Displ : NO
Meas. Tol. : 0.020 m
Add. const. : 0.000 m
No. of Refl : 3
Auto Pos. : ON
Rod Length : 5.000 m
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
Space R1-R2 : 1.000 m
Space R1-R3 : 0.500 m
The "Configuration" let you set the following
parameters that determine program operation and define
the hidden-point rod you are using:
User Displ : YES use the display defined in
"MEASURE & RECORD".
Set NO use the default display of the
program "HIDDEN POINT".
Total
length of
rod
0ealigaretiea
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 113
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
HP
Meas. Tol : Limit for the difference between the
given and measured spacing of the
reflectors. If the tolerance value is
exceeded, the program will issue a
warning.
In case of measurements with 3 prism
the values are also used as limit for
the max. deviation of the 3
measurements.
Add. const. : Input of prism constant for the prisms
of the pole. The prism constant set in
the system is disregarded.
No. of Refl. : Number of the reflectors on the rod
you are using. Move the input cursor
to this line, then toggle to either 2 or 3.
Auto pos. : On the program will automatically
point the telescope of a motorized
theodolite at the third reflector once
the first two reflectors have been
measured. The exact pointing must be
made manually.
Rod Length : Total length of hidden-point rod.
Space R1-R2 : Spacing between the centers of
reflector R1 and reflector R2.
Space R1-R3 : Spacing between the centers of
reflector R1 and reflector R3. Enter
only for rods with three reflectors.
Reflector 3 must be situated between
reflector 1 and 2.
Displays date and version of the running application.
Set values to default. Default values are displayed on
page 112.
Accept the current configuration and proceed to
"MEASURE ROD"
Note that all parameters for the rod you are using must
be defined before you can proceed. If any of the
parameters have not been defined, the program will
issue an error message to this effect. Press OK to clear
the message, then make any necessary settings in the
"CONFIGURATION".
114 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
HP
Neesare hed
The program will display the TPS 1000 "Measure &
Record"dialog or the dialog shown below.
If the difference of the given and measured spacing
between the reflectors exceeds the "Meas. Tol. limit" a
message is displayed.
You may accept the measurement or re-measure the
reflector.
HDNPT\ MEASURE PRISM 1 14:03
M
C
Point no. : Station12
Hz : 1655'50"
V : 9116'20"
Slope Dist. : ----- m
Height diff : ----- m
ALL DIST REC TARGT
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP CONF I<>II
Simultaneously measure and record in the active file.
Proceed with the same dialog for the next reflector. If
the last point has already been measured, the program
will proceed to the "RESULT" dialog.
Measure a distance. Record the measurement in the
active file and proceed with the same dialog for the next
reflector. If the last point has already been measured,
the program will proceed to the "RESULT" dialog.
Measure the distance. Accept the measurement without
recording. Proceed with the same dialog for the next
reflector. If the last point has already been measured,
the program will proceed to the "RESULT" dialog.
The prism constant used in the program is shown in the
distance measurement display during the distance
measurement. The prism name also shown in this
display has nothing to do with the prism constant and
can be ignored.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 115
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
HP
Enter the target data. For further information refer to
chapter "Measure & Record" of "SYSTEM" - user
manual.
Choosing another reflector and therefore another prism
constant via this function is NOT recommended
because the actually selected prism constant is only
used for the current measurement. After confirming/
storing a measurement with / "REC" or "ALL" the
prism constant set in the program configuration is
automatically used again. This could result in errors.
Therefore always set the prism constant of the pole in
the configuration of the program. Refer to pages 112
and 113.
Change the theodolite face.
Call up the CODE function, input of a code block.
Point no. : The Point number.
Hz : Horizontal direction to the hidden
point.
hesalts Once all reflectors have been measured, the program
will display the results of the hidden-point calculation.
If 3 reflectors are used, the hidden point position
obtained from the median value of the 3 combinations is
displayed.
HDNPT\ RESULTS 14:03
Northing : 12145.281 m
Elevation : 306.005 m
M
C
Point no. : Station12
Hz : 1655'50"
V : 9116'20"
Slope Dist. : 3.345 m
Height diff : -0.435 m
Easting : 2253.635 m
NEW REC TARGT
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
116 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
HP
V : Vertical angle to the hidden point.
Slope. Dist. : Slope distance to the hidden point.
Height Diff : Height difference from instrument
station to the hidden point.
Easting : Calculated Easting (E) for the hidden
point.
Northing : Calculated Northing (N) for the
hidden point.
Elevation : Calculated Elevation for the hidden
point.
Take a new hidden-point measurement.
Store the point calculation on the recording device.
If the prism constant is also stored (depending on the
REC mask) during storing of the calculated data of the
hidden point this value can be ignored because it is not
relevant for the calculation.
Enter target data as described in chapter "Measure &
Record" of "SYSTEM" - user manual.
Call up the CODE function, as described in chapter
"Measure & Record" of "SYSTEM" - user manual.
Proceed to measure a new hidden point.
Exit the program.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 117
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
AR
4ree (0ematetiea el 4reel
latredactiea This manual describes the "AREA" program of the TPS
SYSTEM 1000 theodolite series.
P
R
O
G
_
Z
1
5
H N
E
Pt1
Pt2
Pt3
Pt4
PT5
Pt6
An area can be defined by a series of straight lines and
arcs. Arcs are defined by 3 radial points or 2 radial
points and radius.
118 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
AR
Neesare Nede
Straight line
AREA\ MEASURE POINT 14:03
Height diff : ----- m
Easting : ----- m
Northing : ----- m
Elevation : 206.7963 m
Azimuth : 18225'05"
Seg. Len. : 0.203 m
M
C
ALL DIST REC TARGT IMPOR
Segs Meas. : 0
Point no. : 1
Refl.Height : 0.000 m
Hz : 9555'50"
V : 9116'20"
Slope Dist. : ----- m
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP CONF DEL CALC ARC NEW
Segs Meas. : Counts the number of segments. With
a new area the segment counter will be
set to zero.
Seg. Len. : Length of the last straight line
segment measured.
Simultaneously measure and record data on the active
recording device. Return to dialog "MEASURE
POINT"
Measure a distance and record data on the active
recording device.
Measure a distance without recording.
Enter the target data. For further information refer to
chapter "Measure & Record" of "SYSTEM" - user
manual.
Import target coordinates. For further information,
please refer to chapter "Setup" of "SYSTEM" - user
manual.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 119
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
AR
Start the "Configuration editor".
Deletes last completed segment. Resume at the start of a
new segment.
Close the area polygon to the start point and calculates
area and length of perimeter. The display of the results
is shown in chapter "CALCULATION".
Select arc as the next segment.
Resets the segment counter to zero. Results of the last
area computation will be erased.
Call up the CODE function.
120 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
AR
Arcs During measurement, you can choose the ARC function
to measure an arc defined by 3 radial points or 2 points
and radius.
Select the correct options before proceeding with the
first point of the segment.
Ensure the central angle of any arc is always smaller
than 180 (200 gon).
Three Points
Determine the three points of an arc sequentially.
Completing the third point the program continues with
Dialog "Measure point" (page 118).
AREA\ 3 POINT ARC 14:03
Height diff : ----- m
Easting : ----- m
Northing : ----- m
Elevation : ----- m
M
C
ALL DIST REC TARGT IMPOR
3 point ARC, starting point:
Point no. : 1
Refl.Height : 0.000 m
Hz : 9555'50"
V : 9116'20"
Slope Dist. : ----- m
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP RAD
Simultaneously measure and record data on the active
recording device.
Measure a distance and record data on the active
recording device.
Measure a distance without recording.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 121
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
AR
Enter the target data. For further information refer to
chapter "Measure & Record" of "SYSTEM" - user
manual.
Import target coordinates. For further information,
please refer to chapter "Setup" of "SYSTEM" - user
manual.
Select arc defined by 2 points and radius.
Call up the CODE function, as described in chapter
"Measure & Record" of "SYSTEM" - user manual.
Exit the program.
Radius Arc
Determine the two points of an arc sequentially. After
the second point the "Measure point" dialog (page 118)
prompts to input the radius.
AREA\ RADIUS ARC 14:03
Height diff : ----- m
Easting : ----- m
Northing : ----- m
Elevation : ----- m
M
C
ALL DIST REC TARGT IMPOR
Radius ARC, starting point:
Point no. : 1
Refl.Height : 0.000 m
Hz : 9555'50"
V : 9116'20"
Slope Dist. : ----- m
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP 3 PT
122 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
AR
Simultaneously measure and record data on the active
recording device.
Measure a distance and record data on the active
recording device.
Measure a distance without recording.
Enter the target data. For further information refer to
chapter "Measure & Record" of "SYSTEM" - user
manual.
Import target coordinates. For further information,
please refer to chapter "Setup" of "SYSTEM" - user
manual.
Press 3 Pt. to switch to the 3-Point Arc method .
Call up the CODE function, as described in chapter
"Measure & Record" of "SYSTEM" - user manual.
Exit the program.
AREA\ 2 PUNKTE & RADIUS 14:03
M
C
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
Start Pt. : 12
End Pt. : 70
Radius : ----- m
For arcs to the left enter the radius negative and for
arcs to the right enter the radius positive.
Accept the input. Continue with dialog "MEASURE
POINT" (page118).
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 123
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
AR
Calculation Displays number of segments, computed area and
length of perimeter.
AREA\ RESULTS 14:03
M
C
No. Segs. : 10
Area : 892.888 m
Hectares : 0.089
Perimeter : 295.563 m
NEW STORE PLOT
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
No. Segs. : Number of segments used.
Area : Computed area in units of measure.
Hectares/ : Computed area in hectares or acres
1
.
Acres 1 acre = 43560 ft.
Perimeter : Length of perimeter of the current unit
of measure.
1
depending on the setting of the distance unit metre or
feet.
Start a new area. Resets the segment counter to zero.
Results of the last area computation will be erased.
The following format will be used to record calculated
area results:
WI 41: Code block identification
( default = 36 )
WI 42: Number of segments used.
WI 43: Area in the current measurement units,
always with one decimal place.
WI 44: Length of perimeter in the current units of
measure with one decimal place.
124 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
AR
Area results recording format
Code
( default = 36 )
no. of segments area polygon length polygon
perimeter
=4 4500.3 m2 392.2 m
41001+00000036 42...+00000004 43...+00045003 44...+00003922
WI 41 WI 42 WI 43 WI 44
Generate a plot of the area.
Continue with dialog "MEASURE POINT".
Exit the program.
Shows a plot of the present area.
Plet
AREA\ PLOT 14:03
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
RESLT
Return to the dialog "RESULTS".
Umfang
Perimeter
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 125
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
AR
0ealigaretiea
Configuration Editor
Start the "Configuration Editor" from the "MEASURE
POINT" dialog.
AREA\ CONFIGURATION 14:03
INFO DFLT YES
M
C
Two Faces : NO
Code : 36
Log File : OFF
Log FlName : AREA.LOG
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
The "Configuration Editor" sets parameters for further
program operations:
Two Faces : Set YES for dual-face measurement,
NO for single-face.
Code : Enter the block identification code for
recording the area results ( max. eight
alpha numeric characters )
Log File : Set to ON, the program will record
measurement data in a log file in the
format described on page 128.
Log FlName : Enter the Log File Name.
Display date and version of the running application
Set the values to default. Default values are displayed in
dialog above.
126 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
AR
Store the current configuration and proceed to the
dialog "MEASURE POINT". Points can be added to
the current area or a new area can be started.
Exit the program.
Dual-face Measurement In the dual-face mode, the program will prompt for
measurements in both faces. When both measurements
are taken, the program will check the difference
between the two. If the difference in angle is within 27'
(0.5 gon) and the difference of two measured distances
is within 0.5 m (1.64 ft), the observations will be
averaged. These tolerances are used to avoid errors in
target identification. If exceeded an error message will
be displayed.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 127
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
AR
Log File If "Log File" is set to ON the measurements and the
results are stored in the ASCII-file specified within the
"Configuration Editor". This file is created in the
directory LOG on the memory card. Subsequently, you
can read the memory card on your PC and obtain a hard
copy of the Log-file.
Data will always be appended to the specified Log-file.
The Log-file contains the following information:
Header The header line will contain the
program used, information about the
instrument, the name of the data file as
well as date and time.
Record For each section of the area, start
point and end point, horizontal
distance and azimuth are stored.
For arcs with 2 points and radius the
azimuth of arc, radius and length of
arc are also stored.
For 3 point arcs the direction of arc,
radius and length of arc are also
stored.
128 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
AR
Leica VIP Area V 2.10
Instrument : TCM1100, Serial 430000, Joes theodolite
User templ. : User 1
Meas. file : FILE01.GSI
Program Start : 02/23/1995 at 13:00
Segment Number : 1
Start Point : 1
End Point : 2
H Distance : 5.5555m
Azimuth : 14011'17"
Segment Number : 2
Start Point : 2
End Point : 4
Curve Right
Radius : 4.9089m
ARC Length : 2.326m
Segment Number : 3
Start Point : 4
Second Point : 5
End Point : 6
Curve Right
Radius : 5.362m
ARC Length : 2.254m
Number of Segments : 3
Area : 9.8496m2
Hectares : 0.0010
Perimeter : 13.8396m
Typical log file entry in the "AREA" program
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 129
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
Sets el 4agles
latredactiea This manual describes the "Sets of Angles" program of
the TPS SYSTEM 1000 theodolite series.
P
R
O
G
_
Z
1
6
E
The program permits direction measurements to targets
of which coordinates are not necessarily known. The
average direction of all sets, the standard deviation for
one observed direction and the standard deviation for
the average of all directions is computed for each target.
To calculate a result, a minimum of two full sets must
be observed. Measurements in two faces must exist for
each target .
Once the program has "learned" the targets and their
respective sequence during the first set in face I, the
observer is guided throughout the following measuring
sequence.
A maximum of 250 measurements per instrument
station (in 2 faces) can be handled in one calculation.
Pt3
Pt2
Pt1
H
N
Set2 (000'00")
Set1(000'00")
130 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
Sets Neaa
Sets menu - view The point numbers and sequence of the targets are
stored in the program during the observation of the first
half set in face I. This is designated as the "Learning
Phase". The observer is thereafter guided throughout
the observation sequence, i.e. the targets are proposed
as per "learned" sequence using the selected
observation method. To locate the targets easily, the
horizontal and vertical differences in direction are
displayed. Turning these differences to "zero", the
relevant target is visible. Motorized theodolites will
automatically drive the telescope to the specified target
point, if the first half set was measured successfully.
Complete directions must be observed for all targets
within the first set. A complete direction is defined as a
direction observed in both faces.
During observation the program tests, if the correct face
is used. As soon as the last "learned" target has been
observed, the program changes automatically to face II.
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP CONF
SETS\ SETS MENU 14:03
M
C
Start the "CONFIGURATION".
Measure First Set 0
Measure Further Set 1
Calculate Horizontal Sets 2
Calculate Vertical Sets 3
End Program 4
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 131
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
Measure Mode
Entry of target points into a list as well as selecting
points for multiple use.
Displays the previous point from the list of points you
entered. Note that this key will not be available until
there is at least one point in the list.
Displays the next point in the list of points you entered.
Note that this key will not be available until there is
at least one point in the list.
Ends the 1. half set and returns to the dialog "SETS
MENU".
Measure First Set
This option starts the first set and the "Learning Phase"
of a new instrument station. The point number for the
targets must be entered in Dialog "FIRST SET".
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
SETS\ FIRST SET 14:03
M
C
Set no. : 1
Seg. no. : 1
Face : I
Point no. : 501
Refl.Height : 1.300 m
Auto Meas. : YES
LIST <-- --> DONE NUM
Set no. : Displays the active set.
Seq. no. : Displays the sequence number of the
selected target out of the total number
of target used.
Face : Displays the face.
Point no. : Target point number.
Refl.Height : Reflector height of target point.
Auto Meas. : Automatic measurement ON/OFF
132 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
Select alpha-numeric/numeric input.
Exit the program.
Proceed to the "MEASURE" dialog (displayed below).
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP I<>II
SETS\ FIRST SET 14:03
M
C
ALL DIST REC TARGT EDIT
Point no. : 501
Refl.Height : 1.300 m
Hz : 24910'20"
V : 9019'52"
HZ : -----
V : -----
Hz / V : Are not activ during the first set. The
differences are shown for all further sets
relative to the measurements of the first
half set.
This "MEASURE" dialog is shown during the
measurement to targets. The program return to the
dialog "FIRST SET" (page 131) on completion of a
measurement or to the "FURTHER SET" dialog (page
133).
Simultaneously measure and record data on the active
recording device. Return to the dialog "FIRST SET".
Measure and record a distance.
1
Measure without recording the measurement on the
active recording device.
Enter the target data. For further information refer to
chapter "Measure & Record" of the "SYSTEM" - user
manual.
Change the theodolite face.
Proceed to "FIRST SET".
1
Distance measurement is optional.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 133
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
Measure Further Set
To measure the sets, the user is guided the measurement
sequences. The following dialog selects points used
within the 1. half set. The measurement sequence
requires no special target selection due to the pre-
defined configuration.
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP DONE
SETS\ MEASURE SET 14:03
M
C
Set no. : 1
Seg. no. : 1
Face : I
Point no. : 501
Refl.Height : 1.300 m
Auto Meas. : YES
<-- --> POSIT
Set no. : Displays the active set.
Seg. no : Internal ordinal number from 1st half
set.
Face : Displays the face.
Selects the previous point from a list of points.
Selects the next point from a list of points.
Turn the telescope to the selected point.
Returns to the "Sets Menu"
134 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
To detect the targets easily, the horizontal and vertical
angle differences are shown in a special display. If these
are "turned to zero", the selected target is visible within
the field of view.
Motorized instruments sight the target automatically
after the successful measurements of the first half set.
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
TELESCOPE POSITIONING 14:03
M
C
Hz- and V-positioning:
Set direction(s) to zero.
HZ : -356'23"
V : 122'25"
ABORT OK
Hz : Difference in horizontal direction.
V : Difference in vertical direction
Ends the telescope positioning.
Ends the telescope positioning. Are activated if the
present telescope position is within 27' (0.5 gon) of the
expected position. This is confirmed accustically.
Further measurements follow the same rules as
described in chapter "Measure first set".
or
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 135
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
0elcalete Nede Calculate Horizontal and Vertical Sets
The display-format is the same for horizontal and
vertical directions. The data displayed, refer to the
selected calculation.
Standard deviations of a single direction in both faces
(mR) and the standard deviation for an averaged
direction from all sets (mM) are calculated.
Computations of standard deviations require, that all
targets and sets are observed in two faces. Exceptions
may exist, in which case the standard deviation should
be seen as an approximation to be used as a field
control. The correct standard deviations a posteriori can
be calculated using the recorded data and a suitable
computation method.
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
SETS\ HZ SET RESULTS 14:03
M
C
Pts. Active : 4
Set Active : 2
mR : 000'24"
mM : 000'17"
STORE MORE
Pts. Active : Number of observed points used in the
calculation.
Sets Active : Number of observed sets used in the
calculation.
mR : Standard deviation of one observed
horizontal or vertical direction.
mM : Standard deviation of an average
direction from all sets.
136 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
Results of sets of angles are recorded in the activ file
for measurements. (For details see dialog "FORMATS
AND MORE INFORMATION" )
Show the results of individual measurements on the
screen. ( For details see dialog "MORE INFORMATI-
ON")
Exit the program
Formats and Data Recording
The following format is used to record results in the
activ file for measurements.
Number of measurements and accuracies.
WI 41 Code "HZ-RESLT" or "V0-RESLT"
WI 42 Number of targets.
WI 43 Number of observed sets.
WI 44 Standard deviation of a horizontal or
vertical direction.
WI 45 Standard deviation of a horizontal or a
vertical direction averaged from all sets.
HZ-RESLT: (Number of observations and accuracies)
Code Number of
targets
Number of
sets
mR mM
=4 =3 = 52" = 37"
410039+HZ-RESLT 42....+00000004 43....+00000003 44....+00000520 45....+00000370
WI 41 WI 42 WI 43 WI 44 WI 45
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 137
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
Directions averaged from all valid sets.
WI 41: Code "HZ-MEAN0" or "V0-MEAN0".
WI 42: Point number
WI 43: Averaged direction from all sets.
HZ-MEAN0: ( Average from all valid sets )
Code Target number Average of all sets
410040+HZ-MEAN0
410041+HZ-MEAN0
410042+HZ-MEAN0
410043+HZ-MEAN0
42....+00000001
42....+00000002
42....+00000003
42....+00000004
43....+00000000
43....+00641040
43....+01354568
43....+01944557
WI 41 WI 42 WI 43
Code Target numbers Differences or residuals
410044+HZ-DIFF0
410045+HZ-DIFF0
410046+HZ-DIFF0
410047+HZ-DIFF0
42....+00000001
42....+00000002
42....+00000003
42....+00000004
43....+10000000...... .....48....+60000000
43....+10000216...... .....48....-60000216
43....-10000168...... .....48....+60000168
43....-10000041...... .....48....+60000141
WI 41 WI 42 WI 43........ until ........WI 48
Differences or residuals for the points observed.
WI 41: Code "HZ-DIFF0" oder
"V0-DIFF0".
WI 42: Point number.
WI 43 - WI 48: Difference or residual
HZ-DIFF0: ( Difference (r) for Hz-directions and
residuals (v) for vertical directions ).
138 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
More Information
Further information is given relating to the differences
of the measurements. Single points or full sets can be
deactivated prior to the calculation.
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
SETS\ MORE INFO - HZ 14:03
M
C
RECLC S<-- -->S P<-- -->P OFF
Active Pts : 2 Sets: 3
Point no. : 501
Pnt Status : ON
set no. : 1
Set Status : ON
Residual : 000'00"
Active Pts : Number of points used in the
calculation.
Sets : Number of sets used in the
calculation.
Point no. : Target point.
Pnt. Status : Point used for computation (ON/
OFF).
Set no. : Present displayed set.
Set Status : Point used for computation (ON/
OFF).
Residual : Difference in horizontal direction,
using the direction of the active set
and the averaged direction of all sets.
For the vertical directions, the residual
is used to compute the standard
deviations.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 139
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
Re-calculate the results and return to the dialog showing
the results.
Display previous set.
Display the next set.
Display the previous point.
Display the next point.
Exit the program.
140 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
mR 2"
mM = = = 1"

s
3
v 23"
mR= = = 2"
(N-1)(s-1) (4-1)(3-1)
Ixemles ead ased
lermalee
A typical example of a Hz - measurement is shown in
the following list:
The example shows a survey with 3 sets and 4 targets
with directions in ' ".
The calculations are carried out according to the
following table.
PtNr Face I Face II Average
face I+II
(a)
Reduced
average of
set (b)
Average
(d)
r= d - b v= r+q v
1 000'20" 18000'17" 000'19" 000'00" 000'00" 0 +1 1
2 2443'34" 20443'31" 2443'33" 2443'14" 2443'10" -4 -3 9
3 8447'15" 26447'11" 8447'13" 8446'54" 8446'53" -1 0 0
4 30641'52" 12641'42" 30641'47" 30641'28" 30641'28" 0 +1 1
q= -( r)/N
q =
-(5")/4
+1
v=-1
1 4500'13" 22500'16" 4500'15" 000'00" 0 0 0
2 6943'24" 24943'23" 6943'24" 2443'09" +1 +1 1
3 12947'06" 24947'08" 12947'07" 8446'52" +1 +1 1
4 35141'45" 17141'44" 35141'45" 30641'30" -2 -2 4
q= -( r)/N
q =
-(0)/4
0
v=0
1 9000'19" 27000'19" 9000'19" 000'00" 0 -1 1
2 11443'28" 29443'26" 11443'27" 2443'08" +2 +1 1
3 17447'10" 35447'15" 17447'13" 8446'54" -1 -2 4
4 3641'47" 21641'45" 3641'46" 30641'27" +1 0 0
q= -( r)/N
q =
-(2)/4 -1 v=-2
v = 23

Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 141

IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
A typical example of a V - measurement is shown in
the following list:
The example shows a survey with 3 sets and 4 targets
and directions in ' ".
The calculations are carried out according to the
following table.
PtNr Face I Face II Average face
I+II (a)
Average (d) v = d - a v
1 8713'58" 27246'24" 8713'47" 8713'46" -1 1
2 8842'12" 27118'18" 8841'57" 8841'55" -2 4
3 8944'22" 27016'00" 8944'11" 8944'11" 0 0
4 9106'47" 26853'38" 9106'34" 9106'33" -1 1
1 8714'01" 27246'22" 8714'49" -3 9
2 8842'09" 27118'20" 8841'54" +1 1
3 8944'27" 27016'00" 8944'13" -2 4
4 9106'47" 26853'40" 9106'33" 0 0
1 8714'01" 27246'34" 8713'43" +3 9
2 8842'09" 27118'20" 8841'54" +1 1
3 8944'23" 27016'04" 8944'09" +2 4
4 9106'49" 26853'42" 9106'33" 0 0
V= -2
34
v 34"
mR= = = 2"
N*s-1 4*3-1
mR 2"
mM = = = 1"

s
3

v =
142 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
Used formulae and designations
a = In both faces observed and averaged direction.
b = In both faces averaged and reduced direction of a
set
d = Final averaged direction from all sets.
r = Difference between a final direction averaged
from all sets and a single direction of a set.
q = Average of the differences (r).
v = Residuals.
s = Number of sets
N= Number of targets.
r = d - b
v = r + q for horizontal directions
v = d - a for vertical directions
Average of the differences for horizontal directions.
r
q = -
N
Standard deviation of one horizontal direction observed
in two faces.
v
mR=
(N-1)(s-1)
Standard deviation of one vertical direction observed in
two faces.
v
mR=
N*s-1
Standard deviation of an averaged direction from all
sets.
mR
mM =

s
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 143
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
0ealigaretiea
Configuration Editor
Start the "Configuration Editor" from the "SETS
MENU" dialog.
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
SETS\ CONFIGURATION 14:03
M
C
INFO DFLT LIST
Meas Method : <>
User Displ : NO
Hz Tol. : 000'16"
V Angle Tol : 000'16"
Log File : OFF
Log FlName : SETS.LOG
The "Configuration Editor" sets parameters for further
program operations:
Meas Method : > <All targets have to be observed for
face II in opposite order to the
observations in face I.
> >All targets have to be observed in
face II using the same sequence as for
the observations in face I.
Each target has to be observed in
face II immediately after its
measurement for face I has been
completed.
User Displ : Set to YES, the display defined in the
"MEAS" application will be used.
NO uses the "SETS OF ANGLES"
default display.
144 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
Displays date and version.
Set default values. Default values are displayed in
dialog "CONFIGURATION" (page 143).
Exit the program
Store the current configuration and proceed to the
dialog "SETS MENU".
Hz Tol. : Input the tolerance for Hz-directions.
This defines the limit for the
difference between the actual direction
and the direction observed within the
first half set. A change in the horizon-
tal circle orientation is always
accounted for, after observing the first
target within a new set. If the
tolerance is exceeded, a warning is
given.
V Angle Tol : Input the tolerance for vertical
directions. This defines the limit for
the difference in the vertical directions
between the actual observations and
the directions observed within the first
half set. If the tolerance is exceeded, a
warning is given.
Log File : ON, records measurements in a Log-
File.The format is described on page
146.
Log FlName : Enter the Log File Name.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 145
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
Data will always be appended to the specified Log-file.
The Log-file contains the following information:
Header The header line will contain the
program used, information about the
instrument, the name of the data file as
well as date and time.
Record The average horizontal and vertical
angles of all sets, the standard
deviation for one measurement and
the standard deviation of an angle
averaged from all sets, are stored in
the Log-File.
Log File If "Log File" is set to ON the measurements and the
results are stored in the ASCII-file specified within the
"Configuration Editor". This file is created in the
directory LOG on the memory card. Subsequently, you
can read the memory card on your PC and obtain a hard
copy of the Log-file.
146 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
Leica VIP Sets of Angles V 2.10
Instrument : TCM1100, Serial 430000, Joes theodolite
User Templ. : User 1
Meas. File : FILE01.GSI
Program Start : 01/05/1996 at 13:00
Station no. : 132
E=725362.235m N=263587.236m ELV= 569.587m hi= 1.2000m
Horizontal set results:
5 Sets measured with 3 points each.
Standard deviation of any measurement: 000'02"
Standard deviation of mean from all measurements: 000'01"
1. Point no.: 1 mean direction: 000'00" Refl.Height: 0.0000m
2. Point no.: 2 mean direction: 8325'53" Refl.Height: 0.0000m
3. Point no.: 3 mean direction: 17956'28" Refl.Height: 0.0000m
Results of single sets:
1. Point no.: 1
Set 1 : Residual : 000'00" average : 000'00"
Set 2 : Residual : 000'00" average : 000'00"
Set 3 : Residual : 000'00" average : 000'00"
2. Point no.: 2
Set 1 : Residual : 000'33" average : 8325'50"
Set 2 : Residual : -000'01" average : 8325'44"
Set 3 : Residual : -000'32" average : 8325'15"
3. Point no.: 3
Set 1 : Residual : -000'50" average : 17956'28"
Set 2 : Residual : 000'57" average : 17956'30"
Set 3 : Residual : -000'47" average : 17956'55"
Vertical set results:
5 Sets measured with 3 points each.
Standard deviation of any measurement: 000'05"
Standard deviation of mean from all measurements: 000'03"
1. Point no.:1 mean direction:10053'56" Refl.Height: 0.0000m
2. Point no.:2 mean direction:9415'47" Refl.Height: 0.0000m
3. Point no.:3 mean direction:8557'56" Refl.Height: 0.0000m
Results of single sets:
1. Point no.: 1
Set 1 : Residual : -000'45" average : 10053'21"
Set 2 : Residual : 000'27" average : 10053'49"
Set 3 : Residual : -000'52" average : 10053'59"
2. Point no.: 2
Set 1 : Residual : 000'55" average : 9415'52"
Set 2 : Residual : 000'08" average : 9415'39"
Set 3 : Residual : -000'53" average : 9415'10"
3. Point no.: 3
Set 1 : Residual : 000'54" average : 8557'12"
Set 2 : Residual : 000'38" average : 8557'37"
Set 3 : Residual : -000'52" average : 8557'38"
Typical Log-File for "SETS OF ANGLES"
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 147
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
TR
Treverse
latredactiea This manual describes the "Traverse" program of the
TPS-System 1000 instruments.
P
R
O
G
_
Z
1
7
E
H
N
Pt500
SP1
Hz2 Hz3
Hz1
Pt1
Pt2
Pt3
Pt501
Using data about direction and distance, the program
continuously computes the coordinates of the station (in
the example shown above, the instrument "moves" from
one station to the next, previously measured point) and
aligns the horizontal circle.
For a point the coordinates of which are known, the
deviation from the coordinates determined by
measurement can be computed and displayed.
There is no adjustment of these differences in
coordinates and direction. Subsequently, however, the
measurements stored on the PCMCIA can be processed
with the assistance of an appropriate software program.
Individual stations can be calculated as "sideshots"
(SP). The coordinates and directions of these points are
also determined in the course of this program.
If the program is terminated (e.g. to record a detail
point), the values remain stored. The measurement
procedure can be resumed after calling up the program
again.
148 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
TR
Treverse Neaa
Traverse menu
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP CONF
TRAV\ TRAVERSE MENU 14:03
M
C
Occupy station 0
Traverse point 1
Sideshot point 2
Close traverse 3
New traverse 4
End program 5
Start the "CONFIGURATION".
In this display, the individual functions of the program
can be called. After a function has been performed, the
user returns to this display.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 149
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
TR
New traverse Any data of a previous traverse in the memory will be
erased at the start of a new traverse. To avoid
unintentional erasing, a confirmation must be made.
The first dialog requests the entry of the station point
number, height of instrument, station coordinates and
the setting of a spezified Hz-angle.
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
TRAV\ NEW TRAV STATION 14:03
M
C
REC Hz0 IMPOR NUM
Station no. : Station100
Inst.Height : 1.635 m
Stat.Eastng : 23541.025 m
Stat.Northg : 55231.177 m
Stat.Elev. : 521.358 m
Hz : 23315'25"
Records manually entered station data on the active
recording device. The program proceeds to the
"MEASURE MODE" dialog.
Set horizontal-circle direction. For further information,
please refer to chapter "Measure & Record" of "SY-
STEM" - user manual.
Import station coordinates. For further information,
please refer to chapter "Setup" of "SYSTEM" - user
manual.
Alpha-numeric or numeric input.
Exit the program.
Proceed to the "DEFINE BACKSIGHT POINT
MODE" dialog.
150 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
TR
Select method of orientation
Three different methods of the orientations are available
1. Confirm the orientation already set in the system.
1
No measurements are performed (SYS).
2. Calculation of an azimuth from coordinates to one tie
point. A following measurement to a tie point
orientates the Hz-circle (INPUT). See page 151.
3. Manual input of the azimut to one tie point. A
measurement to the tie point is required (AZI). See
page 152.
1
If the orientation was determined with the
"ORIENTATION" program, for example.
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
TRAV\DEFINE BACKSIGHT PT 14:03
M
C
INPUT AZI SYS SEARC NUM
Rec. device : Memory card
Search in : FILE01.GSI
Point/Code : 2
Manual entry of coordinates for tie points. The standard
input dialog of TPS 1000 is used. Continue with the
"MEAS" dialog.
Select the "MEAS" dialog and enter the azimuth.
Confirms the present orientation. Continues with the
dialog "TRAVERSE MENU".
Search coordinates in the active file.
Exit the program.
or
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 151
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
TR
Calculate Azimuth
This dialog corresponds to the TPS-System 1000 basic
dialog. On completion of a measurement, the program
continues either with "MULTIPLE MEAS" or with the
"TRAVERSE MENU" according to the settings in the
configuration.
Simultaneously measure and record data on the active
recording device.
Measure a distance
1
and record data on the active
recording device.
Measure a distance without recording.
Enter target data as described in chapter "Measure &
Record" of "SYSTEM" - user manual.
Change the theodolite face.
Proceed to the dialog "TRAVERSE MENU".
Call up the CODE function.
1
Distance measurement is optional.
TRAV\ NEW TRAVERSE 14:03
M
C
ALL DIST REC TARGT
Height diff : ----- m
Easting : ----- m
Northing : ----- m
elevation : ----- m
Measure Backsight Point
Point no. : 500
Refl.Height : 1.300 m
Hz : 24910'20"
V : 9019'52"
Sloe Dist. : ----- m
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP I<>II
152 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
TR
Enter Backsight Azimuth
This dialog corresponds to the TPS-System 1000 basic
dialog with the additional entry of the backsight
azimuth.
On completion of the first measurement, the program
continues either with "MULTIPLE MEAS" or with the
"TRAVERSE MENU" according to the settings in the
configuration.
TRAV\ NEW TRAVERSE 14:03
M
C
ALL DIST REC TARGT
Measure Backsight Ponit
BS Azimuth : -----
Point no. : 500
Refl.Height : 1.300 m
Hz : 24910'20"
V : 9019'52"
Slope Dist. : ----- m
Height diff : ----- m
Easting : ----- m
Northing : ----- m
Elevation : ----- m
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP I<>II
Simultaneously measure and record data on the active
recording device.
Measure a distance
1
and record data on the active
recording device.
Measure a distance without recording.
Enter target data as described in chapter "Measure &
Record" of "SYSTEM" - user manual.
Change the theodolite face.
Call up the CODE function.
1
Distance measurement is optional.
BS Azimuth : Enter the backsight azimuth for the
orientation.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 153
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
TR
Occupy station The instrument is set up for a new traverse point or
sideshot. The angle measurement (distance
measurement is optional) is made to a tie point or to the
last traverse point. This dialog corresponds to the TPS-
System 1000 basic dialog. After the function has been
performed, the station coordinates and orientation are
set in the instrument.
TRAV\ OCCUPY TRAVERSE PT14:03
M
C
ALL DIST REC TARGT SS
Slope Dist. : ----- m
Height diff : ----- m
Easting : ----- m
Northing : ----- m
Elevation : ----- m
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP I<>II
Station no. : 2
Backsight : 1
Inst.Height : 1.300
Refl.Height : 1.300 m
Hz : 24910'20"
V : 9019'52"
Station no. : Station point number.
Backsight : Backsight to tie point.
Simultaneously measure and record data on the active
recording device.
Measure a distance
1
and record data on the active
recording device.
Measure a distance without recording.
Enter target data as described in chapter "Measure &
Record" of "SYSTEM" - user manual.
1
Distance measurement is optional.
154 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
TR
Selects the last measured sideshot or the last traverse
point as the new station.
2
Change the theodolite face.
Proceed to the dialog "TRAVERSE MENU".
Call up the CODE function.
2
Only active if a sideshot point was measured.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 155
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
TR
Traverse Point /
Sideshot Point
A distance measurement is carried out to the respective
tie point. Both functions use the same dialog. This
corresponds to the TPS-System 1000 "MEASURE"
dialog. On completion of the measurement, the program
continues either with "MULTIPLE MEAS" or with the
"TRAVERSE MENU" according to the settings in the
configuration.
TRAV\MEAS TRAVERSE PT 14:03
M
C
ALL DIST REC TARGT
Easting : ----- m
Northing : ----- m
Elevation : ----- m
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP I<>II
Point no. : 20
Refl.Height : 1.300 m
Hz : 24910'20"
V : 9019'52"
Slope Dist. : ----- m
Height diff : ----- m
Simultaneously measure and record data on the active
recording device.
Measure a distance and record data on the active
recording device.
Measure a distance without recording.
Enter target data as described in chapter "Measure &
Record" of "SYSTEM" - user manual.
Change the theodolite face.
Exit the program.
156 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
TR
Close traverse The program requires a closing point for comparison
with the last traverse point measured. The default point
number is the starting point of the travers.
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
TRAV\ DEFINE CLOSING PT 14:03
M
C
INPUT ST PT SEARC
Rec. device : Memory-Card
Search in : FILE02.GSI
Point/Code : 123
Enter coordinates using the standard input dialog.
Confirms the coordinates of the starting point.
Search coordinates in the database.
Exit the program.
TRAV\ CLOSURE RESULTS 14:03
M
C
STORE PLOT MENU
AziCrdMiscl : 9019'52"
H Precision : 83569 m
V Precision : 6528 m
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
No. of Pts. : 3
Length : 1676.367 m
Crd. miscl. : 0.040 m
Hgt. miscl. : 0.262 m
Easting : -0.016 m
Northing : -0.037 m
or
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 157
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
TR
No. of Pts. : Number of traverse points
Length : Length of traverse
Crd. miscl. : Coordinate misclosure
Hgt.miscl. : Height misclosure
Easting : Misclosure in easting
Northing : Misclosure in northing
AziCrdMisc1 : Azimuth of coordinate misclosure
H Precision : Position precision =
traverse length
=
Crd. misclosure
V Precision : Vertical precision =
height difference
=
Hgt. misclosure
The results of the traverse are recorded in the file for
measurements on the active recording device.
Plot of the traverse.
Continue with the "TRAVERSE MENU".
Exit the program.
Continue with the "TRAVERSE MENU".
158 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
TR
Examples
Codeblock with results of the traverse closure :
WI 41: Code 38
WI 42: Number of traverse points.
WI 43: Length of traverse (sum of legs).
WI 44: Azimuth of misclosure
WI 41 Code 39
WI 42 Misclosure
WI 43: Misclosure easting
WI 44: Misclosure northing
WI 45: Misclosure in height
WI 41 Code 40
WI 42 Position precision (traverse length /
misclosure)
WI 43: Vertical precision (height difference /
misclosure)
410010+00000038 42....+00000005 43....+01013515 44....+01928220
410011+00000039 42....+00000123 43....+00000045 44....+00000114 45....+00000087
410012+00000040 42....+00008239 43....+00010000
110015+00123456 25.143+14611200 84..40+00001215 85..40-00003153
86..40+00403285 88..10+00001555
Measurementblock with the traverse Station
Coordinates of station points
WI 11: Point number
WI 25: Hz (correction of orientation)
WI 84: E
0
easting coordinate
WI 85: N
0
northing coordinate
WI 86: Height
WI 88: Instrument height
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 159
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
TR
Plet
Generates a plot showing the measurement
configuration.
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
TRAV\ PLOT 14:03
M
C
RESLT
N
Return to the dialog "CLOSURE RESULTS".
160 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
TR
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
TRAV\ CONFIGURATION 14:03
M
C
INFO DFLT YES
Two Faces : NO
Mult Meas : NO
Code : 38
Log File : OFF
Log FlName : TRAVERSE.LOG
The "Configuration Editor" sets parameters for further
program operations:
Two Faces : Set YES for dual-face measurement,
NO for single-face.
Mult Meas : Set YES for the multiple
measurement,
NO for the single measurement.
Code : Input of code number for recording
results (maximum 8 characters)
Log File : Set to ON, the program will record
measurement data in the Log File
according to the format described on
page 163.
Log FlName : Enter the Log File Name.
Start the "Configuration Editor" from the "TRAVERSE
MENU" dialog.
Displays date and version.
0ealigaretiea
Configuration Editor
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 161
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
TR
Set all values to default. Default values are shown in
dialog on page 160.
Select (NO/YES, alpha-numeric/numeric input, ON/
OFF).
Confirm displayed parameter and continues with the
"TRAVERSE MENU".
Dual-face Measurement
In the dual-face mode, the program will prompt for
measurements in both faces. When both measurements
are taken, the program will check the difference
between the two. If the difference in angle is within 27'
(0.5 gon) and the difference of two measured distances
is within 0.5 m (1.64 ft), the observations will be
averaged. These tolerances are used to avoid errors in
target identification. If exceeded an error message will
be displayed.
TRAV\ MULTIPLE MEAS 14:03
M
C
MEAS CLEAR REC TARGT ACCEP
V : 10345'25"
Slope Dist : 50.125 m
Point no. : 500
No. of Meas : 1
HZ : 000'30"
V : 000'22"
Slope Dist : 0.001 m
Hz : 4500'52"
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
Multiple Measurement
The measurement to a point can be repeated as often as
desired to achieve a higher accuracy or reliability. The
mean value of the measurements and the respective
standard deviation is displayed.
162 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
TR
Point no. : The target point number.
No. of Meas : Counter of the measurements.
Hz : Standard deviation of the horizontal
direction for a single measurement.
V : Standard deviation of the vertical
angle for a single measurement.
Slope Dist : Standard deviation of the slope
distance for a single measurement.
Hz : Mean value of the HZ-measurements.
V : Mean value of the HZ-measurements.
Slope Dist : Mean value of the slope distances.
Further measurements.
Delete all measurements of the current point and start
again.
Record the mean value of the measurements on the
active recording device. Return to the "TRAVERSE
MENU" dialog.
Enter target data as described in chapter "Measure &
Record" of "SYSTEM" - user manual.
Accept the mean values and return to the "TRAVERSE
MENU".
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 163
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
TR
Log File If "Log File" is set to ON the measurements and the
results are stored in the ASCII-file specified within the
"Configuration Editor". This file is created in the
directory LOG on the memory card. Subsequently, you
can read the memory card on your PC and obtain a hard
copy of the Log-file.
Data will always be appended to the specified Log-file.
The Log-file contains the following information:
Header The header line will contain the name
of this program, information about the
instrument, the name of the data file
and date and time.
Record Computed coordinates of traverse
points are continously stored. The
option Close traverse in the
"TRAVERSE MENU" (Dialog page
148) displays and stores at any time
the coordinate - differences of traverse
points of which the coordinates are
known.
164 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
TR
Leica VIP Traverse V 2.10
Instrument : TCM1100, Serial 430000, Joes theodolite
User Templ : User 1
Meas. File : FILE01.GSI
Program Start : 02/23/1995 at 10:25
Backsight : 500
Station : Pt.1
E= -0.679m N= 9.545m H= 400.062m hi= 1.530m
Station : Pt.2
E=-13.462m N=10.528m H= 400.170m hi= 1.650m
Station : Pt.3
E=26.513m N=16.821m H= 401.260m hi= 1.610m
Last Trav.Pt. : 501
E= -77.949m N= 25.037m H= 399.923m
Closing Pt. : 501
E= -78.016m N= 24.996m H= 400.181m
No. of Pts. : 4
Length : 82.788m
Hor. miscl. : 0.047m
Vert. miscl. : 0.268m
DEasting : -0.017m
DNorthing : -0.031m
Azi H.miscl : 22651'25"
H Precision : 2036
V Precision : 2356
Typical log file entry in the "TRAVERSE"
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 165
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LR
lecel hesectiea
latredactiea This manual describes the "LOCAL RESECTION"
program of the TPS SYSTEM 1000 theodolite series.
P
R
O
G
_
Z
1
8
E
H N
Pt1
Pt2
Two points are measured from any instrument station.
The first point measured forms the centre of a local
coordinate system (N=0; E=0; H=0). The second point
measured determines the direction of the positive N -
axis.
The distance between the two points must be at least 50
mm
The program can be used to deduce the three-dimensio-
nal local coordinates for the instrument station and the
orientation of the horizontal circle from measurements
to 2 target points. To compute the position coordinates,
at least 4 elements (2 distances and 2 directions) are
necessary.
For simultaneous determination of the local station
elevation, height of instrumentand height of reflector
must already have been input.
The program allows measurement in single or dual-face
mode.
N
Local
E0
N0
E
Local
000'00"
(Local)
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LR
166 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
Stetiea 0ete
Enter station point number and height of the instrument.
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP CONF
LRES\ STATION DATA 14:03
M
C
Station no. : Station2
Inst.Height : 1.555 m
Proceed to the dialog "MEASURE POINT 1".
Start the "CONFIGURATION"
Quit program .
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 167
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LR
Terget Peiats
This dialog is similar to the TPS System 1000s basic
"MEASURE MODE" dialog. Once the measurement to
the first and to the second point is taken, the program
will proceed to the dialog "RESULTS".
Simultaneously measure and record data on the active
recording device.
Measure a distance.
Record the measurement on the active recording device.
Enter target data as described in chapter "Measure &
Record" of "SYSTEM" - user manual.
Change the theodolite face.
Accept the measurement.
Call up the CODE function, input of a code block.
LRES\ MEASURE POINT 1 14:03
M
C
ALL DIST REC TARGT
Height diff : 1.002 m
Easting : 231.463 m
Northing : 56.785 m
Elevation : 72.235 m
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP I<>II
Point no. : 12
Remark 1 : -----
Refl.Height : 1.300 m
Hz : 210'20"
V : 9019'52"
Horiz.Dist. : ----- m
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LR
168 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
0elcaletiea
In this dialog the calculated station coordinates are
shown with orientation.
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
LRES\RESULTS <L.SQRS> 14:03
M
C
Station no. : 1
Easting : -3.369 m
Northing : 0.569 m
Elevation : 0.235 m
Orientation : 13534'56"
SET STORE
Station no : Station point number
Easting : Calculated E (local) for the station
Northing : Calculated N (local) for the station
Elevation : Calculated Elevation (local) for the
station
Orientation : Angular correction needed to orient
the instrument
Set orientation and station coordinates on the
instrument. Note that this key will end the program.
Record the following results on the active recording
device:
WI 11 Station Point Number
WI 25 Orientation correction
WI 84 Station Easting
WI 85 Station Northing
WI 86 Station Elevation
WI 87 Last reflector height used
WI 88 Instrument Height
Exit the program.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 169
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LR
0ealigaretiea
Configuration Editor
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
LRES\ CONFIGURATION 14:03
M
C
INFO DFLT YES
Start the "Configuration Editor" from the "STATION
DATA" dialog.
Two Faces : NO
The "Configuration Editor" sets parameters for further
program operations:
Two Faces : YES for dual-face measurement,
NO for single-face.
Displays date and version of the running application.
Set the value to the default. (Two Faces = NO, see
display above)
Store the current configuration and proceed to the
dialog "STATION DATA".
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LR
170 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
Dual-face Measurement In the dual-face mode, the program will prompt for
measurements in both faces. When both measurements
are taken, the program will check the difference
between the two. If the difference in angle is within 27'
(0.5 gon) and the difference of two measured distances
is within 0.5 m (1.64 ft), the observations will be
averaged. These tolerances are used to avoid errors in
target identification. If exceeded an error message will
be displayed.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 171
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
RO
heed liae
latredactiea The manual describes the program "ROAD LINE" for
the Leica TPS 1000 series.
P
R
O
G
_
Z
2
6
[km] 0 50 100 150 200 300
centre-line
offset (+)
centre-line
offset (-)
points to be
staked
The program is suitable for setting out points which are
determined by chainage and centre-line offset along a
calculated alignment. If V-alignments and cross-
sections are defined for the alignment, the points can be
calculated and set out spatially ("ROAD
STAKEOUT").
Conversely, if a point in the vicinity of the alignment
has been determined by measurement, the chainage and
centre-line offset can be determined ("X-SECTION
CHECK").
This version of "ROAD LINE" is only valid for a GSI
configuration.
172 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
RO
The program reads the geometrical elements of an
alignment from files expressed in GSI format. The data
for the alignment are grouped in accordance with the
three components of an alignment. The file names must
comply with certain rules:
1. Hz-alignment
File name: ALN?????.GSI
2. V-alignment
File name: PRF?????.GSI
3. Cross section
File name: CRS?????.GSI
You can insert a permitted character for a DOS file
name in place of a ? .
1. Permitted elements in the Hz-alignment
Straight defined by chainage and
coordinates of tarting point
Curve defined by chainage and
coordinates of starting point
Radius of arc (- = left-hand curve
+ = right-hand curve)
Spiral defined by
chainage and coordinates of
starting point
parameter A
1
of spiral (negative
parameter = spiral into left-hand
curve)
End of project (EOP) chainage and coordinates of
end-point
1
A = L x Rwhere L = length of spiral; R = radius of
curve
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 173
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
RO
2. Permitted elements in V-alignments
Straight defined by
chainage and height of starting
point
Curve defined by
chainage and height of starting
point
radius of arc (- = crest + = dip)
Parabola defined by
chainage and height of starting
point
parameters of parabola
1
(- = crest
+ = dip)
End of project (EOP) chainage and height of end-
point of gradient
3. Permitted elements in cross sections
Chainage
Offset
Height difference relative to axis
To enter the data, you can use a PC and the program
ROADDATA.EXE supplied, or you can use the pro-
gram FILE EDITOR on the TPS 1000.
1
2p x (H - H
0
) = (S - S
0
) S
0
, H
0
station and height of vertex
174 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
RO
Program concept The "ALIGNMENT CALCULATION" program only
permits measurements in one face.
Before the program is started, the following procedures
are carried out:
1. Setting user profile and name of the data file.
2. Determining the instrument station and the
orientation
"ROAD STAKEOUT" requires the following input:
1. Chainage for the point to be set out
2. Offset and height displacement of the point to be set
out, or zero point of cross section relative to axis
(optional)
3. Selection of a point on the cross section (optional)
On the basis of this input, the coordinates of the point to
be set out are determined and are transferred to the
program "SETTING OUT" for post-processing.
The "X-SECTION CHECK" requires the following
input:
1. Measurement to ground point
The parameters calculated and displayed are
respectively the chainage, the offset, and the height
difference of the point measured with respect to the
centre-line.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 175
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
RO
4ligameat
Selection of files The files with the definitions for the Hz-alignment, the
V-alignment and the cross sections are selected. The
names of the files must be in accordance with the
guidelines laid down in section "Introduction".
The Hz-alignment must always be selected. The choice
of a V-alignment and of transverse sections is optional.
If no V-alignment is selected, points can only be set
out or inspected in two dimensions. Without V-
alignments, no transverse sections can be selected.
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP CONF
ROADL\ SELECT ALN FILES 14:03
M
C
Horiz.Aln. : ALNTEMP
Vert. Aln. : PRFTEMP
Cross Secs : CRSTEMP
Log FlName : ROAD.LOG
Horiz.Aln : Selects definition of Hz-alignment.
Vert. Aln : Selects definition of gradient (optio-
nal)
Cross Secs : Selects definition of cross section.
(optional)
Log FlName : Name of the log file in use.
Start the "Configuration".
Continues with dialog "CHECKING FILES".
176 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
RO
Checking files The files selected are inspected for formal input errors
and for geometrical deviations.
The job identification for the three input files is
inspected, as are possible errors in the data format e.g.
missing or incorrect word index (WI). Errors are
indicated by appropriate messages. The inspection can
be continued or interrupted. If serious formal errors
are found, the inspection is aborted.
Geometrical deviations include the tangent directions
of adjacent elements and the chord lengths of elements.
Deviations which exceed the permitted tolerance are
displayed. The inspection of the files can be continued
or interrupted.
After inspection, the program returns to Dialog 2. The
input values can be corrected, either on a PC using the
program "ROADDATA.EXE" or on the TPS1000 using
the programm "FILE EDITOR".
ROADL\ CHECKING FILES 14:03
M
C
NO YES
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
ALN: Deflection tolerance
exceeded at chainage 8918'00".
Difference in direction is
000'27". Override?
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 177
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
RO
Exceeding the permitted tolerance is accepted and the
inspection is continued. Longitudinal errors are
distributed proportionally by changing the scale.
Because of the variable curvature, deviations in the
tangential direction are not taken into account.
When the program is called up again, the permitted
tolerance is inspected only if the data have been
changed or if the tolerance limits have been changed.
178 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
RO
Pregrem llen
Chainage and centre-line
offset
Hght. Shift : 0.000 m
ChaingeIncr : 100.000 m
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
ROADL\ CHAINAGE &OFFSET 14:03
M
C
Chainage : 0.000 m
Element : POB
Offset : 0.000 m
HghtOffset : 0.000 m
CHECK CH--> <--CH XSEC
The dialog is used to enter the longitudinal and cross
section data for a point to be set out, or to call the
function "X-SECTION CHECK".
Chainage : The present chainage for
"STAKEOUT".
After setting-out is completed, the
chainage is automatically changed to
the next value divisible by
ChaingeIncr.
The chainage of the main points
(change of elements) is displayed
independently of ChaingeIncr. Any
desired chainage can be keyed in.
For the function "X-SECTION
CHECK" the values displayed and
data from the cross section do not
influence the calculation in the "X-
SECTION CHECK".
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 179
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
RO
Element : The element type on which the
chainage displayed is located.
The elements are output in full. Both
adjacent elements are displayed in the
main points.
Offset : Horizontal displacement (offset) of
the point to be set out in relation to the
centre line.
HghtOffset : Height displacement of the point to be
set out in relation to the centre line.
(The amount of the vertical
displacement is also taken into
account.)
Hght. Shift : All heights in the alignment are
changed by this amount. The value
can only be changed in the dialog
"CONFIGURATION".
ChaingeIncr : The chainage difference when setting
out. The chainage is automatically
incremented by this amount.
Calls the function "X-SECTION CHECK".
Displays the next chainage up which is divisible by
ChaingeIncr. If the end of the alignment is overshot, a
warning is given once. After the end of the alignment,
the calculation is based on the tangent of the last
element.
Displays the next chainage down which is divisible by
ChaingeIncr. If there is a shortfall at the beginning of
the alignment, a warning is given once. Before the
beginning of the alignment, the calculation is based on
the tangent of the first element.
Calls the dialog "CROSS SECTIONS".
Calls the dialog "POINT COORDINATES" in order to
display the coordinates of the point to be set out. From
there, calls the program "STAKEOUT".
180 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
RO
Cross sections Selecting points in the cross section
For setting out, points on the defined cross section can
be selected.
ROADL\ CROSS SETIONS 14:03
M
C
<-- <-- CENTR --> -->
Hght. Shift : 0.999999 m
1R*
Chainage : 100.000
Cross Sect. : +TMPL0001
CL Offset : 0.000 m
CL HGTDiff : 0.000 m
Offset : 3.000 m
HghtOffset : 0.000 m
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP PLOT
1R : Numbering the profile points from the
centre line outwards: 1L, 2L, 3L, etc.
for points to the left; 1R, 2R, 3R etc.
for points to the right. The centre of
the cross-sectional profile is numbered
0C. Points already set out are marked
* . The display bar displays in
graphical form the position of the
point in the profile.
Chainage : Chainage currently valid.
Cross Sect. : Name of the valid cross section. A
different profile can be searched for.
CL Offset : Horizontal distance from the centre of
the profile to the current profile point.
CL Hgt Diff : Vertical distance from the centre of
the profile to the current profile point.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 181
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
RO
Offset : Horizontal displacement (centre-line
offset) of the centre of the X-section
by this amount.
HghtOffset : Height displacement of the centre of
the X-section
(The value of the HghtOffset is also
taken into account.)
Hght. Shift : All heights in the alignment are
changed by this amount. The value
can only be altered in this dialog.
Displays far-left profile point.
Displays profile point one place further to the left.
Displays centre of profile.
Displays profile point one place further to the right.
Displays far-right profile point.
Displays diagram of cross section.
Calls dialog "POINT COORDS" to display coordinates
of point to be set out. From there, calls program
"STAKEOUT".
182 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
RO
Plot
A simple diagram of the cross section is displayed. The
vertical scale is exaggerated three times.
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
ROADL\ PLOT 14:03
M
C
XSEC
Returns to dialog "CROSS SECTION".
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 183
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
RO
The coordinates of a stakeout point are displayed and
passed to the program "STAKEOUT".
Stakeout
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP END
ROADL\ POINT COORDS 14:03
M
C
Chainage : 34225.000
Refl.Height : 1.634 m
Easting : 1010.567 m
Northing : -34213.077 m
Elevation : 345.655 m
STAKE
The coordinates calculated from the input values of the
dialog "CHAINAGE & OFFSET" or "CROSS
SECTION" are displayed.
Calls program "STAKEOUT". The coordinates
displayed are transferred.
or
[km] 0 50 100 150 200 300
P
R
O
G
_
Z
2
7
calculated
Line (calculated)
actual
centre-line
offset
(-) (+)
Terrain
(actual)
184 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
RO
X-section Check
The function "X-SECTION CHECK" is called in the
dialog "CHAINAGE & OFFSET".
Any desired point in the topography is measured.
The program calculates
- the chainage,
- the offset and
- the height difference
of the point in relation to the defined centre line.
[km] 0 50 100 150 200 300
P
R
O
G
_
Z
2
8
H
projected
(calculated)
built
(actual)
+2,5
-2,5
+1,2 -3,8
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 185
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
RO
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP I<>II END
ROADL\ X-SECTION CHECK 14:03
M
C
Point no. : 12
Remark 1 : -----
Refl.-Height : 1.567 m
HZ : 13540'47"
V : 9134'50"
Horiz.Dist : 8855'58"
ALL DIST REC TARGT IMPOR
Measures and records in the active file and goes on to
display the chainage and the offset relative to the
centre-line definition.
Measures the distance. Stores the measurement in the
active file and goes on to display the chainage and the
offset of the point.
Measures the distance. Does not store the measurement.
Goes on to display the chainage and the offset relative
to the centre-line definition.
Enters the target-point data. This function is described
in chapter "Measure & Record" of "SYSTEM" - user
manual.
For manually entering the coordinates of a point, or for
reading in the active coordinate file. Displays the
chainage and the offset of the point.
Calls the code function.
This displays the defined standard measuring dialog,
which may be different from the one depicted above.
186 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
RO
Display of results
Displayed are
- chainage,
- offset and
- height offset
in relation to the centre line.
Hght. Shift : 0.000 m
ChaingeIncr : 100.000 m
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP STORE
ROADL\ CHAINAGE &OFFSET 14:03
M
C
CHECK CH--> <--CH XSEC
Chainage : The chainage of the point measured is
displayed.
Element : The type of element on which the
point measured is located.
The names of the elements are
displayed without abbreviation. In the
main points, the two adjacent elements
are displayed.
Offset : Horizontal displacement (offset) of
the point measured in relation to the
centre line. If several results are
available (eg, at tight corners) the
point with the shortest distance to the
centre line is indicated. By changing
the calculation limits in the
configuration, the calculation range
can be limited and as a result, the
found stationing can be influenced.
Chainage : 23.456 m
Element : Straight line
Offset : -3.553 m
HghtOffset : 0.254 m
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 187
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
RO
HghtOffset : Height displacement of the point
measured in relation to the centre line.
(The amount of the vertical
displacement is also taken into
account.)
Hght. Shift : All heights in the alignment are
changed by this amount. The value
can only be changed in the dialog
"CONFIGURATION".
ChaingeIncr : The chainage difference when setting
out. The chainage is automatically
incremented by this amount.
Re-calls the function "X-SECTION CHECK".
See section "Chainage and centre-line offset".
See section "Chainage and centre-line offset".
The result of the road station and offset is stored.
See section "Chainage and centre-line offset".
See section "Chainage and centre-line offset".
188 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
RO
0ealigaretiea
Configuration Editor
Start the "Configuration Editor" from the "SELECT
ALN FILES" dialog.
ROADL\ CONFIGURATION 14:03
M
C
INFO DFLT EDIT
3D Stake : ON
Log File : OFF
Log FlName : ROAD.LOG
BaseChainge : 0.000
End Chainge : 0.000
ChaingeIncr : 100.000 m
Hght. Shift : 0.000 m
Deflct.Tol. : 000'16''
ChaingeTol. : 10 m
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
The parameters defining the further course of the
program are determined in the "Configuration Editor":
BaseChainge : Setting the starting point for
calculation when in the "X-SECTION
CHECK" function.
EndChainage : Setting the end point for calculation in
the "X-SECTION CHECK" function.
ChaingeIncr : Difference in chainage when setting
out. The chainage is automatically
incremented by this amount.
Hght. Shift : All heights in the alignment are
changed by this amount. The value
can be changed only when you are in
this dialog.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 189
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
RO
Deflct.Tol. : Permissible deviation of the tangent
directions for adjacent elements. A
message appears if this value is
exceeded. The input is always in
milligon.
ChaingeTol. : Permissible deviation of the (chord)
length of an element and of the
distance calculated from the end-point
coordinates, expressed in the length
units set. A message appears if this
value is exceeded.
3D Stake : ON for setting out positions and
heights. The height can be set out only
if the V-alignment has been defined.
OFF for setting out only positions.
Neither a V-alignment nor a typical
cross-section can be set out.
Log File : Set to ON, the program will record
measurement data in a log file in the
format described on page 190.
Log FlName : Enter the log file name.
Displays date and version of the program.
Sets standard values . The values are displayed in
dialog on page 188.
Accepts and stores parameters displayed. Continues to
display "SELECT ALN FILES".
190 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
RO
Log File If "Log File" is set to ON the measurements and the
results are stored in the ASCII-file specified within the
"Configuration Editor". This file is created in the
directory LOG on the memory card. Subsequently, you
can read the memory card on your PC and obtain a hard
copy of the Log-file.
Data will always be appended to the specified Log-file.
The Log-file contains the following information:
Header includes:
- the program used,
- information about the instrument,
- the file to store the measurement
data,
- the date and the time.
Configuration the name of the input files for:
- the Hz-alignment,
- the V-alignment and
- the transverse section.
Measurement - Instrument station with coordinates
and instrument height.
- Stakeout point with chainage,
- offset
1
and height displacement
2
relative to centre line,
- comparison values from planning,
and associated differences.
For the alignment inspection,
- the coordinates of the point
measured are stored along with
- the associated station,
- the offset and
- the height difference.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 191
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
RO
1
This value results from
- the displacement of the zero point of the profile and
- the displacement taken from the transverse profile.
2
This value results from
- the displacement of the zero point of the profile and
- the displacement taken from the transverse profile
- the height displacement in the configuration.
Leica VIP Road line V 2.10
Instrument : TCM1800, Serial 410000, TCM1800
User templ. : User 1
Meas. file : FILE01.GSI
Program Start : 02/07/1996 at 10:43
Hz-alignment : ALNMSPLZ.GSI
V-alignment : PRFMSPLZ.GSI
Cross Sect. : CRSMSPLZ.GSI
Station no. : TRASSE
E= -10.0000m N= 25.0000m ELV= 400.0000m hi= 0.0000m
Point no. : 3386
Chainage : 49.2812, Offset= -4.9130m, HghtOffset= 0.2473m
As Measured : E= -11.6393m, N= 27.8821m, ELV= 400.8301m
Point no. : 3386
Chainage : 49.2812, Offset= -4.9130m, HghtOffset= 0.2473m
Design : E= -11.6391m, N= 27.8823m, ELV= 400.8301m
Staked : E= -11.6394m, N= 27.8830m, ELV= 400.8266m
Deltas : dE= 0.0004m, dN= -0.0007m, dELV= 0.0035m
Example of a log file for the program "ROAD LINE"
192 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
RO
0ete lermet
This section describes the input-data format for the Hz-
alignment, the V-alignment and the cross section. To
enter the data, you can use a PC and the program
"ROADDATA.EXE" supplied, or you can use the
program "FILE EDITOR" on the TPS 1000.
Hz-alignment The definition of the road elements is based on the main
points (=starting and finishing points of the
geometrical element) and on the element parameters.
Refer to the example in the next diagram.
The alignment starts at main point no. 1 and finishes at
main point no. 4.
Here, the geometrical elements are:
Straight - curve - straight.
The curve radius is R.
The starting point of a geometrical element is also the
finishing point of the preceding adjacent element.
P
R
O
G
_
Z
2
1
3 4
2
1
R
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 193
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
RO
The header
41....+00Job-ID 42....+HZALIGNM 43....+STACOORD
WI 41 Job-ID: Job identification consists of 8
alphanumeric characters.
WI 42 Fixed name of the Hz-alignment file. May
not be changed.
WI 43 Fixed name of the main-point method. May
not be changed.
Element Defined by: Declaration
Straight Starting point [E, N] STRAIGHT
Arc Start of curve [E, N],
radius R.
000CURVE
Spiral into curve
starting with
R= *)
Start of curve [E, N],
A-parameter
00SPIRIN
Spiral out of curve
ending at R= *)
Start of curve [E, N],
A-parameter
0SPIROUT
End of project End point [E, N] 00000EOP

*) The spiral must begin or end with R = .

The Hz-alignment file is structured as follows:
1. Header
2. Data block: Definition 1st geometrical element
3. Data block: Definition 2nd geometrical element
4. Data block: Definition 3rd geometrical element
.....
n. Data block: Definition of end of project
194 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
RO
The data block
11....+0STATION 71....+GEOM_ELE 72....+RAD/PARA 73....+TEMPLATE
81..10+00000000 82..10+00000000
WI 11 STATION: Chainage at the start of the
element. 8-digit number.
WI 71 GEOM_ELE: Geometrical element
according to table page 190 (STRAIGHT,
000CURVE, 00SPIRIN, 0SPIROUT,
00000EOP).
WI 72 RAD/PARA: Arc radius or A-parameter for
the spirals. 8-digit number.
If WI 71 = STRAIGHT / 00000EOP, then WI
72 = 00000NON.
Sign:
+, for curves to the right (centre of circle to
the right of the alignment),
-, for curves to the left (centre of circle to the
left of the alignment).
WI 73 TEMPLATE: Name/number of the cross-
sectional profile for the geometrical element
defined in WI 71. 8 alphanumeric characters.
The following combinations are reserved and
are not to be used: 00000NON and
LASTTMPL.
WI 81 E-coordinate of the main point (starting
point, start of curve, end point according to
table page 190). 8-digit number.
WI 82 N-coordinate of the main point (starting
point, start of curve, end point according to
table page 190). 8-digit number.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 195
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
RO
Also:
The header is always at the beginning of the file.
The Hz-alignment file must always contain at least
two elements.
The units and decimal places used in the WIs 11 and
72 are in accordance with the definitions in WIs 81
and 82.
The chainage is produced from the sum of the
element lengths.
A cross-sectional profile may be assigned more than
once.
Geometrical elements can be combined freely, for
example as:
- Transition curve (straight - spiral - arc)
- Vertex spiral ( straight - spiral into curve
- spiral out of curve - straight)
Unusual applications are also possible:
- Breakpoint (straight - straight)
- Right-angle (straight - straight, or straight - 90
arc - straight)
There is no limitation on the size of the Hz-alignment
file. As a result, as many data blocks as required can
be entered if a file is created on the PC using the
DOS program "ROADDATA.EXE". If a file is
created/edited using the program "FILE EDITOR"
on the TPS1000 there is a limitation of 200 data
blocks.
Check your data for errors (typing errors, signs etc.)
before you load it into the memory card.
The program supports the user during the setting-out by
controlling the length of curves. It compares the length
of the element from the chainage (WI 11) with the
calculated main-point values, thus enabling input errors
in the chainage or in the coordinates to be detected.
However, the signs of arcs and of spirals are not
checked (see example below).
196 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
RO
P
R
O
G
_
Z
2
1
2
1
4 3
-R
+R
If the wrong sign (-R) is used, the arc is mirrored
between the main points 2 and 3.
410001+Example1 42....+HZALIGNM 43....+STACOORD
110002+00000000 71....+STRAIGHT 72....+00000NON 73....+Tmpl0125
81..10+02000000 82..10+06000000
110003+00198832 71....+00SPIRIN 72....-00122474 73....+Tmpl0123
81..10+02186841 82..10+06068005
110004+00348832 71....+000CURVE 72....-00100000 73....+Tmpl0123
81..10+02307751 82..10+06150344
110005+00450725 71....+0SPIROUT 72....-00100000 73....+Tmpl0123
81..10+02304071 82..10+06247816
110006+00550725 71....+STRAIGHT 72....+00000NON 73....+Tmpl0125
81..10+02227794 82..10+06310759
110007+00714138 71....+00SPIRIN 72....+00054772 73....+Tmpl0124
81..10+02086275 82..10+06392465
110008+00789138 71....+000CURVE 72....+00040000 73....+Tmpl0124
81..10+02037807 82..10+06445859
110009+00824376 71....+0SPIROUT 72....+00044721 73....+Tmpl0124
81..10+02048886 82..10+06478120
110010+00874376 71....+STRAIGHT 72....+00000NON 73....+Tmpl0125
81..10+02094478 82..10+06496445
110011+01127904 71....+00000EOP 72....+00000NON 73....+Tmpl0125
81..10+02344154 82..10+06540469
Example: S-line with a straight connection
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 197
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
RO
The project start is at the nadir. After the first straight
there follows a left curve, then a right curve. There are
also spirals and a straight between the arcs.
The cross sections are assigned as follows:
Straight Tmpl0125
Left curve Tmpl0123
Right curve Tmpl0124
The last character at the end of each data line must be a
space (ASCII character 32).
WI 11 and WI 41: The block number is located from
position 3 to 6.
of the geometrical elements. The starting point of one
element is also the finishing point of the previous
element.
V-alignment
The V-alignment definition (= V-alignment)
The V-alignment is defined with the main points (1 - 6).
The main points form the starting and finishing points
P
R
O
G
_
Z
2
3
1
2
3
4 5
6
Straight Straight Straight
Parabola
+p
Parabola
-p
198 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
RO
Element Defined by: Declaration
Straight Starting point [chainage, H] STRAIGHT
Arc Start of curve [chainage, H],
radius R.
000CURVE
Parabola Start of curve [chainage, H],
parabola parameter p
PARABOLA
End of project Finishing point [chainage, H] 00000EOP
The Header
41....+00Job-ID 42....+0VALIGNM 43....+STACOORD
WI 41 Job-ID: Job identification consists of 8
alphanumeric characters.
WI 42 Fixed name of the V-alignment file. May not
be changed.
WI 43 Fixed name of the main-point method. May
not be changed.
The V-alignment file is structured as follows:
1. Header
2. Data block: Definition 1st geometrical element
3. Data block: Definition 2nd geometrical element
4. Data block: Definition 3rd geometrical element
.....
n. Data block: Definition of end of project
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 199
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
RO
The Data block
11....+0STATION 71....+GEOM_ELE 72....+RAD/PARA 83..10+00HEIGHT
WI 11 STATION: Chainage (from the Hz-
alignment) at the start of the element. 8-digit
number.
WI 71 GEOM_ELE: Geometrical element
according to table page 195 (STRAIGHT,
000CURVE, PARABOLA, 00000EOP).
WI 72 RAD/PARA: Arc radius or parabola
parameter. 8-digit number.
If WI 71 = STRAIGHT / 00000EOP, then WI
72 = 00000NON.
Sign: "+" = dip, "-" = crest
WI 83 HEIGHT: Height H of the main point
(starting point, start of curve, end point, in
accordance with table page 195). 8-digit
number.
Also:
The header is always at the beginning of a data file.
The V-alignment file must be composed of at least
two parts (starting- and finishing point).
The units and decimal places used in the WIs 11 and
72 are in accordance with the definition in WI 83.
The chainage is given by the sum of the horizontal
element lengths.
Geometrical elements can be combined freely.
There is no limitation on the size of the V-alignment
file. As a result, as many data blocks as required can
be entered if a file is created on the PC using the
DOS program "ROADDATA.EXE". If a file is
created/edited using the program "FILE EDITOR"
on the TPS1000 there is a limitation of 200 data
blocks.
Check your data for errors (typing errors, signs etc.)
before you load it into the memory card.
200 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
RO
An example of the wrong sign used with an arc of
radius R or with the parabola parameter p:
410001+Example1 42....+0VALIGNM 43....+STACOORD
110002+00000000 71....+STRAIGHT 72....+00000NON 83..10+00400000
110003+00300000 71....+PARABOLA 72....-01142936 83..10+00422500
110004+00500000 71....+STRAIGHT 72....+00000NON 83..10+00420000
110005+00550000 71....+PARABOLA 72....+02091126 83..10+00415000
110006+00850000 71....+STRAIGHT 72....+00000NON 83..10+00406522
110007+01127904 71....+00000EOP 72....+00000NON 83..10+00418605
Example: Crest and dip
The last character in each data line must always be a
space (ASCII character 32).
WI 11 and WI 41: The block number is located from
position 3 to 6.
If the wrong sign (+R/+p) is used, the summit becomes
a trough.
4 1
3
+R/+p
2
-R/-p
P
R
O
G
_
Z
2
4
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 201
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
RO
Cross sections
The points in the cross section are defined in
accordance with:
- the centre-line offset sCLO (neg.: pt. left / pos.: pt.
right) and
- the height difference sH related to the alignment
point (neg.: pt. lower / pos.: pt. higher than
alignment)
The template file is structured as follows:
1. Header
2. Data block: Cross section 1 / point no. 1
3. Data block: Cross section 2 / point no. 2
4. Data block: Cross section 3 / point no. 3
.....
n. Data block: Cross section x / point no. y
Element Defined by: Declaration
Height difference Planned height difference
with respect to alignment
-
Centerline offset Planned centre-line offset -
Aspect:
chainage increasing
P
R
O
G
_
Z
2
4
2
1
3
4
5
left right
alignment
sCLO (pos.)
sH (neg.)
202 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
RO
The Header
41....+00Job-ID 42....+TEMPLATE
WI 41 Job-ID: Job identification consists of 8
alphanumeric characters.
WI 42 Fixed name of the template file. May not be
changed.
The data block
11....+TMPLNAME 35..10+DISTANCE 36..10+000HDIFF
WI 11 TMPLNAME: Name/number of the cross
section, consisting of 8 alphanumeric
characters. The following designations are
reserved and may not be used: 00000NON
and LASTTMPL.
WI 35 DISTANCE: Centre-line offset of a
transverse-profile point. 8-digit number.
WI 36 HDIFF: Height difference of a transverse-
profile point. 8-digit number
Also:
The header must always be at the start of a data file.
The file must contain at least one cross section.
Profile points belonging to the same cross section
must always be together in a single data set. The
points need not be sorted within the data set.
The individual transverse-profile data sets need not
be sorted within the template file.
For a cross section file there is a limitation of 200
data blocks. The maximum number of points in a
cross section is 48.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 203
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
RO
Recommendation:
If in general you prepare an empty template (only the
zero point), you can at any time choose this template
in order to manually enter points or to call up axis
points. Call this template something like AXIS or
EMPTY.
Check your data for errors (typing errors, signs etc.)
before you load it into the memory card.
The last character at the end of each data line must
always be a space (ASCII-character 32).
WI 11 and WI 41: The block number is located from
position 3 to 6.
Example: Cross section
41....+Example1 42....+TEMPLATE
110002+Tmpl0123 35..10-00013000 36..10-00003000
110003+Tmpl0123 35..10-00010000 36..10-00005000
110004+Tmpl0123 35..10-00004000 36..10-00000100
110005+Tmpl0123 35..10+00004000 36..10+00000100
110006+Tmpl0123 35..10+00010000 36..10-00006000
110007+Tmpl0123 35..10+00013000 36..10-00003500
110008+Tmpl0124 35..10-00012000 36..10-00002000
110009+Tmpl0124 35..10-00011000 36..10-00004000
110010+Tmpl0124 35..10-00004000 36..10+00000100
110011+Tmpl0124 35..10+00004000 36..10-00000100
110012+Tmpl0124 35..10+00011000 36..10-00005000
110013+Tmpl0124 35..10+00012000 36..10-00002500
204 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
RO
Tbe heed 0ete Iatr,
regrem
The Leica "ROADDATA.EXE" for providing
setting-out data files
Once the alignment has been designed using road-
design software, the resulting data consist of main
points, element parameters and cross sections. These
data must be brought into a structure which can be
loaded into the memory card. There are two ways to
product the three setting-out data files (Hz-alignment
file, V-alignment file and transverse-profile file):
a) writing an individually-customised program to
automatically generate and convert the necessary
data
b) entering the data by hand into the Leica
"ROADDATA.EXE" program. The program offers a
convenient way of entering the values by offering
suitable menu controls. The program reformats the
data into the structure required.
Once the three setting-out data files are ready, all you
need to do is to transfer the data into the memory card,
using a suitable transfer program.
Using the "ROADDATA.EXE" program
Copy the program from the diskette to your hard
disk, using the DOS command
COPY
and from there into e.g. disk drive C:\.
Start the program with the command
C:\>roaddata
Follow the menu directives. An integrated Help
function gives you support, particularly when you are
using the keyboard commands.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 205
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
0000
latredactiea This manual describes the "COGO" program of the
TPS SYSTEM 1000 theodolite series.
The following provides a general overview of the
individual COGO functions.
The "Inverse" routine computes the direction and
distance between two points.
The "Traverse" routine computes a new coordinate
point given a direction and distance from a known point
(Polar plotting).
The "Intersections" routine computes:
Bearing-Bearing intersections,
Bearing-Distance intersections or
Distance-Distance intersections.
The function "Offsets" consists of the following
subfunctions:
"Distance point straight line"
Calculates the difference in length/abscissa and the
lateral deviation/ordinate with reference to a basis
line emanating from a known point.
"Orthogonal point calculation"
A new point can be calculated which emanates from
a basis line using the difference in length/abscissa
and the lateral deviation/ordinate.
The "Point Arc" routine computes a radius point given
any three points.
206 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
The point coordinates can either:
be determined by measurement,
entered manually using a keyboard or
read from the memory card.
Data, both measured and read from the file, can be
mixed. This means, however, that station coordinates
and orientation have to be correctly set.
Directions and distances can be entered manually,
called up or freshly determined. The values can then be
amended by means of multiplication, division, addition
and subtraction.
The program "Stakeout" can be called up directly from
the individual result dialog boxes (if available) in order
to set out the points immediately.
The program "Stakeout" assumes that the instrument is
set and oriented to a known point.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 207
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
0ealigaretiea
Start the "Configurations Editor" from the "COGO
MENU" dialogue.
COGO\ CONFIGURATION 14:03
M
C
Direc. Type: Bearing
Offset : YES
INFO DFLT LIST
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
Displays date and version.
Set all values to default. The values are shown in the
dialogue above.
Accept displayed values and proceed to the dialogue
"COGO MENU".
Exit the program.
The "Configuration Editor" sets parameters for further
program operations:
Direc. Type : Bearing
Azimuth
Offset : YES entering a parallel
displacement is possible
NO entering a parallel
displacement is not possible
s
208 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
laactiea selectiea
(0000 Neaal
COGO\ COGO MENU 14:03
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP CONF
M
C
Inverse 0
Traverse 1
Intersections 2
Offsets 3
3 Point Arc 4
End COGO 5
Call up the "Configuration-Editor".
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 209
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
N
laverse (eler
celcaletieal
Computes distance and direction between two points.
E
N H
C
O
G
O
_
0
1
Azimuth
Magnetic bearing
1
2
H
o
r
i
z
o
n
t
a
l

d
i
s
t
a
n
c
e
Search : Direction (magnetic bearing or
azimuth)
Horizontal distance
Given : point 1 (y, x)
point 2 (y, x)
Station coordinates and orientation need to have been
set correctly before the coordinates of point 1 (and/or 2)
can be determined by measurement.
210 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
Call up the function in the "COGO MENU" dialog.
COGO\ INVERSE FROM 14:03
INPUT MEAS SEARC NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
Rec. device : Memory Card
Search in : FILE01.GSI
Point/Code : 58
Manual entering of the first (second) point of the
straight line. The standard TPS 1000 input dialog box
appears.
Measuring the first (second) point of the straight line.
This function is described in chapter "Measure &
Record" (Measurement dialogue) of the "System" - user
manual.
Search for the coordinates of the first (second) point in
the coordinate file. This function is described in chapter
"Setups" (Import function) of the "System" - user
manual.
Exit the program.
or
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 211
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
The following dialog box shows the result of the polar
calculation from both the given points:
COGO\ INVERSE RESULTS 14:03
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
From : 1010
To : 1020
Southwest : 8937'45"
Horiz.Dist. : 31.237 m
From : Display of point number of the first
point
To : Display of point number of the second
point
Southwest : Display of magnetic bearing.
If "Azimuth" is selected in the
configuration during "Direc. Type:",
then the azimuth will be displayed
between both the points.
Horiz.Dist. : Display of horizontal distance
between the points
Return to "COGO MENU".
Exit the program.
212 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
Treverse
Computes a new point given a direction and distance
from a known point.
N
E
N H
C
O
G
O
_
0
1
Azimuth
Magnetic bearing
1
2
H
o
r
i
z
o
n
t
a
l

d
i
s
t
a
n
c
e
Search : point 2 to be accetped (Y, X)
Given : point 1 (Y, X),
Direction (magnetic bearing or
azimuth),
Horizontal distance.
Station coordinates and orientation need to have been
set correctly before the coordinates of point 1 can be
determined by measurement.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 213
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
Call up the function from the "COGO MENU".
COGO\ TRAVERSE FROM 14:03
INPUT MEAS SEARC NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
Rec. device : Memory Card
Search in : FILE01.GSI
Point/Code : 58
Manual entering of the first point. The standard TPS
1000 input dialog box appears.
Measuring the first point.
This function is described in chapter "Measure &
Record" (Measurement dialogue) of the "System" -
user manual.
Search for the coordinates of the first point in the
coordinate file. This function is described in chapter
"Setups" (Import function) of the "System" - user
manual.
Exit the program.
or
214 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
Defining direction by
magnetic bearing
If "Bearing" is selected in the configuration during
"Direc. Type:", then the following dialog box appears:
Determining the direction by means of the function
"Polar calculation"(refer to chapter "Inverse").
INPUT Enter quadrant, magnetic bearing.
RCALL Call up of a direction which has been
previously stored using the function
"Polar calculation".
Accept displayed values and proceed with dialogue
"TRAVERSE" (page 218).
COGO\ TRAVERSE 14:03
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP MODIF
M
C
Direction to Traverse
Quadrant : 1
NorthEast : 000'00"
Offset : 0.000 m
INV RCALL EDIT
Quadrant : Enter quadrant:
1 = NorthEast
2 = SouthEast
3 = SouthWest
4 = NorthWest
Northeast : Enter magnetic bearing
Offset : Enter parallel displacement.
Only active if "YES" is entered in the
configuration during "Offset:"
Left = negative parallel offset
Right = positive parallel offset
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 215
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
Changing the direction see under existing dialog box
"MODIFY BEARING"
Exit the program.
COGO\ MODIFY BEARING 14:03
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
NorthEast : 000'00"
Multiply : -----
Divide : -----
Add : 000'00"
Subtract : 000'00"
NorthEast : 000'00"
EDIT
NorthEast : Display of entered magnetic bearings
(ref. to dialogue "TRAVERSE", page
214)
Multiply : Entering multiplication factor
Divide : Entering division factor
Add : Entering angle for a correction to the
right
Subtract : Entering angle for a correction to the
left
NorthEast : Display of corrected magnetic
bearings
Accept displayed values and proceed with dialogue
"TRAVERSE" (page 218).
216 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
Defining direction by
Azimuth
If "Azimuth" is selected in the configuration during
"Direc. Type:", then the following dialog box appears:
COGO\ TRAVERSE 14:03
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP MODIF
M
C
Direction to Traverse
Azimuth : 000'00"
Offset : 0.000 m
INV RCALL EDIT
Determining the direction by means of the function
"Polar calculation" (refer to chapter "Inverse").
INPUT Entering Azimuth
RCALL Call up of a direction which has been
previously stored using the function
"Polar calculation".
Accept displayed values and proceed with dialogue
"TRAVERSE" (page 218).
Changing the direction (refer to dialogue "MODIFY
AZIMUTH ", page 217)
Exit the program.
Azimuth : Entering Azimuth
Offset : Entering parallel displacement.
Only active if "YES" is entered in the
configuration during "Offset:"
Left = negative parallel offset
Right = positive parallel offset
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 217
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
COGO\ MODIFY AZIMUTH 14:03
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
Azimuth : 000'00"
Multiply : -----
Divide : -----
Add : 000'00"
Subtract : 000'00"
Azimuth : 000'00"
EDIT
Azimuth : Display of entered Azimuth (ref. to
"TRAVERSE", page 216)
Multiply : Entering multiplication factor
Divide : Entering division factor
Add : Entering angle for a correction to the
right
Subtract : Entering angle for a correction to the
left
Azimuth : Display of corrected Azimuth
Accept displayed values and proceed to dialogue
"TRAVERSE" (page 218).
218 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
Defining horizontal
distance
COGO\ TRAVERSE 14:03
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP MODIF
M
C
Distance to Traverse
Horiz.Dist. : 0.000 m
Offset : 0.000 m
INV RCALL EDIT
Horiz Dist : Entering horizontal distance
Offset : Entering parallel displacement.
Only active if "YES" is entered in the
configuration during "Offset:"
Left = negative parallel offset
Right = positive parallel offset
Determining the distance by means of the function
"Polar calculation" (refer to chapter "Inverse").
INPUT Entering horizontal distance
RCALL Call up of a distance which has been
previously stored using the function
"Polar calculation".
Accept displayed values and proceed to dialogue
"TRAVERSE RESULTS" (page 220).
Changing the distance (refer to dialogue "MODIFY
DISTANCE", page 219).
Exit the program.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 219
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
COGO\ MODIFY DISTANCE 14:03
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
Horiz.Dist. : 0.000 m
Multiply : -----
Divide : -----
Add : 0.000 m
Subtract : 0.000 m
Horiz.Dist. : 0.000 m
EDIT
Horiz.Dist. : Display of entered horizontal distance
(refer to dialogue "TRAVERSE",
page 218)
Multiply : Entering multiplication factor
Divide : Entering division factor
Add : Entering distance for a positive
correction
Subtract : Entering distance for a negative
correction
Horiz.Dist. : Display of corrected horizontal
distance
Accept displayed values and proceed to dialogue
"TRAVERSE RESULTS" (page 220).
220 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
The following dialog box shows the result of the
traverse:
COGO\ TRAVERSE RESULTS 14:03
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
Point no. : -----
Easting : 0.000 m
Northing : 0.000 m
Elevation : -----
STORE STAKE
Point no. : Entering point number of the point to
be accepted
Easting : Display of east coordinate
Northing : Display of north coordinate
Elevation : Entering height (optional)
The following results have been stored in the active
measurement data file:
WI 11 Station Point Number
WI 81 Easting coordinate
WI 82 Northing coordinate
WI 83 Elevation (optional)
If "Point no." has not be entered, the button is not
occupied.
Call up the program "Stakeout".
The program "Plotting" assumes that the instrument is
set and oriented to a known point.
If "Point no." has not be entered, the button is not
occupied.
Return to "COGO MENU".
Exit the program.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 221
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
latersectieas
Call up the function from the "COGO MENU".
COGO\ INTERSECTIONS 14:03
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
Bearing - Bearing 0
Bearing -Distance 1
Distance-Distance 2
End Intersections 3
222 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
N
Bearing-Bearing
Intersection
N H
C
O
G
O
_
0
2
E
Search : Coordinates of intersection
(Y, X)
Given : point 1 (Y, X), direction (magnetic
bearing or azimuth)
point 2 (Y, X), direction (magnetic
bearing or azimuth)
Station coordinates and orientation need to have been
set correctly before the coordinates of point 1 (and/or 2)
can be determined by measurement.
Azimuth
positive parallel
offset
Intersection
Magnetic
bearing
Direction (here:
Azimuth =
Magnetic
bearing)
1
2
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 223
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
COGO\ BEARING #1 FROM 14:03
INPUT MEAS SEARC NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
Rec. device : Memory Card
Search in : FILE01.GSI
Point/Code : 58
Manual entering of the first (second) point. The
standard TPS 1000 input dialog box appears.
Measuring the first (second) point of the straight line.
This function is described in chapter "Measure &
Record" (Measurement dialogue) of the "System" - user
manual.
Search for the coordinates of the first (second ) point in
the coordinate file. This function is described in chapter
"setups" (Import function) of the "System"-user
manual.
Exit the program.
or
Call up the function from the menu
"INTERSECTIONS".
224 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
If "Bearing" is selected in the configuration during
"Direc. Type:", then the following dialog box appears:
COGO\ BEARING #1 14:03
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP MODIF
M
C
Direction from first point
Quadrant : 1
NorthEast : 000'00"
Offset : 0.000 m
INV RCALL EDIT
Quadrant : Enter quadrant (First or second
straight lines)
1 = Northeast
2 = Southeast
3 = Southwest
4 = Northwest
NorthEast : Enter magnetic bearing (First or
second straight lines)
If "Azimuth" is selected in the
configuration during "Direc.Type:",
then the azimuth of the first straight
line (or the second straight line) can
be entered.
Offset : Entering parallel displacement.
Only active if "YES" is entered in the
configuration during "Offset:"
Left = negative parallel offset
Right = positive parallel offset
Determining the direction by means of the function
"Polar calculation" (refer to chapter "Inverse").
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 225
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
INPUT Enter bearing, mangnetic bearing resp.
azimuth (if "Azimuth" is selected in
the configuration during "Direc.
Type:"
RCALL Call up of a direction which has been
previously stored using the function
"Polar calculation".
Accept displayed values
Changing the direction (as dialog box "MODIFY
BEARING", page 215 resp. "MODIFY AZIMUTH",
page 217)
Exit the program.
226 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
The following dialog box shows the result of the
bearing-bearing intersection:
COGO\BRG-BRG RESULTS 14:03
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
Point no. : -----
Easting : 0.000 m
Northing : 0.000 m
Elevation : -----
STORE STAKE
Point no. : Entering point number of the bearing-
bearing
Easting : Display of east coordinate
Northing : Display of north coordinate
Elevation : Entering height (optional)
The following results have been stored in the active
measurement data file:
WI 11 Station Point Number
WI 81 Easting coordinate
WI 82 Northing coordinate
WI 83 Elevation (optional)
If "Point no." has not be entered, the button is not
occupied.
Call up the program "Stakeout".
The program "Plotting" assumes that the instrument is
set and oriented to a known point.
If "Point no." has not be entered, the button is not
occupied.
Return to "INTERSECTIONS".
Exit the program.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 227
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
Search : Bearing-bearing coordinates
S1 and S2 (Y, X)
Given : point 1 (Y, X), direction
(magnetic bearing or azimuth)
point 2 (Y, X), radius
Station coordinates and orientation need to have been
set correctly before the coordinates of point 1 (and/or 2)
can be determined by measurement.
Bearing-Distance
Intersection
N
H N
E
C
O
G
O
_
0
3
2
positive parallel
offset
Radius
S2
S1
1
Direction (here:
Azimuth = Magnetic
bearing)
228 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
COGO\ BEARING FROM 14:03
INPUT MEAS SEARC NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
Rec. device : Memory Card
Search in : FILE01.GSI
Point/Code : 58
Manual entering of the first point (or circle centre
point). The standard TPS 1000 input dialog box
appears.
Measuring the first point (or circle centre point). This
function is described in chapter "Measure & Record"
(Measurement dialogue) of the "System"-user manual.
Search for the coordinates of the first point (or circle
centre point) in the coordinate file. This function is
described in chapter "Setups" (Import function) of the
"System"-user manual.
Exit the program.
or
Call up the function from the menu
"INTERSECTIONS".
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 229
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
If "Bearing" is selected in the configuration during
"Direc. Type:", then the following dialog box appears:
COGO\BEARING-DISTANCE 14:03
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP MODIF
M
C
Direction from bearing point
Quadrant : 1
NorthEast : 000'00"
Offset : 0.000 m
INV RCALL EDIT
Quadrant : Enter quadrant:
1 = Northeast
2 = Southeast
3 = Southwest
4 = Northwest
NorthEast : Enter magnetic bearing
If "Azimuth" is selected in the
configuration during "Direc. Type:",
then the azimuth of the straight line
can be entered.
Offset : Entering parallel displacement.
Only active if "YES" is entered in the
configuration during "Offset:"
Left = negative parallel offset
Right = positive parallel offset
Determining the direction by means of the function
"Polar calculation" (refer to chapter "Inverse").
230 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
INPUT Enter bearing, mangnetic bearing
resp. azimuth (if "Azimuth" is
selected in the configuration during
"Direc. Type:"
RCALL Call up of a direction which has been
previously stored using the function
"Polar calculation".
Accept displayed values
Changing the direction (as dialog box "MODIFY
BEARING", page 215 resp. "MODIFY AZIMUTH",
page 217)
Exit the program.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 231
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
Enter distance from point:
COGO\BEARING-DISTANCE 14:03
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP MODIF
M
C
Distance from point
Horiz.Dist. : 0.000 m
INV RCALL EDIT
Horiz.Dist. : Entering radius
Determining the radius by means of the function "Polar
calculation" (refer to chapter "Inverse").
INPUT Entering radius
RCALL Call up of a radius which has been
previously stored using the function
"Polar calculation".
Accept displayed values
Changing the direction (as dialog box "MODIFY
DISTANCE", page219).
Exit the program.
232 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
COGO\ BRG-DIST RESULTS 14:03
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
Point no. : -----
Easting : 0.000 m
Northing : 0.000 m
Elevation : -----
OTHER STORE STAKE
The following dialog box shows the result of the
bearing-distance intersection:
Point no. : Entering point number of the bearing-
bearing
Easting : Display of east coordinate
Northing : Display of north coordinate
Elevation : Entering height (optional)
Changing between both solutions
The following results have been stored in the active
measurement data file:
WI 11 Station Point Number
WI 81 Easting coordinate
WI 82 Northing coordinate
WI 83 Elevation (optional)
If "Point no." has not be entered, the button is not
occupied.
Call up the program "Stakeout".
The program "Plotting" assumes that the instrument is
set and oriented to a known point.
If "Point no." has not be entered, the button is not
occupied.
Return to "INTERSECTIONS".
Exit the program.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 233
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
Distance-Distance
Intersection
Search : Bearing-bearing coordinates
S1 and S2 (Y, X)
Given : point 1 (Y, X), radius 1
point 2 (Y, X), radius 2
Station coordinates and orientation need to have been
set correctly before the coordinates of point 1 and/or 2
can be determined by measurement.
E
C
O
G
O
_
0
4
N
H N
1
Radius 1
Radius 2
2
S1
S2
234 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
COGO\ DISTANCE #1 FROM 14:03
INPUT MEAS SEARC NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
Rec. device : Memory Card
Search in : FILE01.GSI
Point/Code : 58
Manual entering of the first circle centre point (2
nd
circle centre point). The standard TPS 1000 input
dialog box appears.
Measuring the first circle centre point (2
nd
circle centre
point). This function is described in chapter "Measure
& Record" (Measurement dialogue) of the "System"-
user manual.
Search for the coordinates of the first circle centre point
(2
nd
circle centre point) in the coordinate file. This
function is described in chapter "Setup" (Import
function) in the "System" - user manual.
Exit the program.
or
Call up the function from the menu
"INTERSECTIONS".
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 235
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
Enter distance from points:
COGO\ DISTANCE-DISTANCE 14:03
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP MODIF
M
C
Distance from first point
Horiz.Dist. : 0.000 m
INV RCALL EDIT
Horiz.Dist. : Entering distance from first point (2
nd
point)
Determining the radius by means of the function "Polar
calculation" (refer to chapter "Inverse").
INPUT Entering radius
RCALL Call up of a radius which has been
previously stored using the function
"Polar calculation".
Accept displayed values
Changing the direction (as dialog box "MODIFY
DISTANCE", page219).
Exit the program.
236 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
The following dialog box shows the result of the
distance/distance intersection:
COGO\ DIST-DIST RESULTS 14:03
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
Point no. : -----
Easting : 0.000 m
Northing : 0.000 m
Elevation : -----
OTHER STORE STAKE
Point no. : Entering point number of the bearing-
bearing
Easting : Display of east coordinate
Northing : Display of north coordinate
Elevation : Entering height (optional)
Changing between both solutions
The following results have been stored in the active
measurement data file:
WI 11 Station Point Number
WI 81 Easting coordinate
WI 82 Northing coordinate
WI 83 Elevation (optional)
If "Point no." has not be entered, the button is not
occupied.
Call up the program "Stakeout".
The program "Plotting" assumes that the instrument is
set and oriented to a known point.
If "Point no." has not be entered, the button is not
occupied.
Return to "INTERSECTIONS".
Exit the program.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 237
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
0llsets
Call up the function in the "COGO MENU".
COGO\ OFFSETS 14:03
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
Distance--Offset 0
Set Point by Dist--Offset 1
End Offsets 2
238 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
N
Search : Difference in length/abscissa (L)
Lateral deviation/ordinate (Q)
Base point coordinates (Y, X)
Given : Baseline Start Point 1 (Y, X),
Baseline End Point 2 (Y, X),
lateral point 3 (Y, X)
Station coordinates and orientation need to have been
set correctly before the coordinates of point 1resp. 2
and/or point 3 can be determined by measurement.
Explanation of the polarity rule of L and Q
During entering, the polarity is based on the straight
line 1 -> 2.
+ Q Parallel displacement to the right
- Q Parallel displacement to the left
+ L Displacement from basis point 1 in the direction
of basis point 2
- L Displacement from basis point 1 in the opposite
direction to basis point 2
Distance-Offset
E
C
O
G
O
_
0
5
H N
1
2
3
Q
L
Base point
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 239
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
COGO\ BASELINE START PT. 14:03
INPUT MEAS SEARC NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
Rec. device : Memory Card
Search in : FILE01.GSI
Point/Code : 58
Manual entering of the baseline start point resp. the
baseline end point (or the lateral point) . The standard
TPS 1000 input dialog box appears.
Measuring the baseline start point resp. the baseline end
point (or the lateral point).This function is described in
chapter "Measure & Record" (Measurement dialogue)
of the "System"-user manual.
Search for the coordinates of baseline start point resp.
the baseline end point (or the lateral point) in the
coordinate file. This function is described in chapter
"Setup" (Import function) of the "System"-user manual.
Exit the program.
or
Call up the function from the menu "OFFSETS".
240 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
The following dialog box shows the results:
COGO\ OFFSET RESULTS 14:03
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
Point no. : -----
Easting : 0.000 m
Northing : 0.000 m
Elevation : -----
Distance : 0.000 m
Offset : 0.000 m
NEW STORE STAKE
Point no. : Entering point number of the base
point
Easting : Display of east coordinate
Northing : Display of north coordinate
Elevation : Entering height (optional)
Distance : Display difference in length/abscissa
(L)
Offset : Display lateral deviation/ordinate (Q)
Entering the new lateral point with reference to the
already existing basis line.
The following results have been stored in the active
measurement data file:
WI 11 Station Point Number
WI 81 Easting coordinate
WI 82 Northing coordinate
WI 83 Elevation (optional)
If "Point no." has not be entered, the button is not
occupied.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 241
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
Call up the program "Stakeout".
The program "Plotting" assumes that the instrument is
set and oriented to a known point.
If "Point no." has not be entered, the button is not
occupied.
Return to the menu "OFFSETS".
Exit the program.
Search : Lateral point 3 coordinates (Y, X)
Given : Baseline Start Point 1 (Y, X),
Baseline End Point 2 (Y, X),
Difference in length/abscissa (L)
Lateral deviation/ordinate (Q)
Station coordinates and orientation need to have been
set correctly before the coordinates of point 1resp. point
2 can be determined by measurement.
N
E
C
O
G
O
_
0
5
H N
1
2
3
Q
L
Orthogonal point
calculation
242 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
Explanation of the polarity rule of L and Q
During entering, the polarity is based on the straight
line 1 -> 2.
+ Q Parallel displacement to the right
- Q Parallel displacement to the left
+ L Displacement from basis point 1 in the direction
of basis point 2
- L Displacement from basis point 1 in the opposite
direction to basis point 2
Call up the function in the menu "OFFSETS".
COGO\ BASELINE START PT. 14:03
INPUT MEAS SEARC NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
Rec. device : Memory Card
Search in : FILE01.GSI
Point/Code : 58
Manual entering of the baseline start point (or the
baseline end point). The standard TPS 1000 input
dialog box appears.
Measuring the baseline start point (or the baseline end
point). This function is described in chapter "Measure
& Record" (Measurement dialogue) of the "System"-
user manual.
Search for the coordinates of baseline start point (or the
baseline end point) in the coordinate file. This function
is described in chapter "Setup" (Import function) of the
"System"-user manual.
Exit the program.
or
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 243
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
Enter distance along baseline (L):
COGO\DISTANCE FROM START 14:03
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP MODIF
M
C
Distance along baseline
Horiz.Dist. : 0.000 m
INV RCALL EDIT
Horiz.Dist. : Enter distance along baseline (L)
Determining the distance along baseline (L) by means
of the function "Polar calculation" (refer to chapter
"Inverse").
INPUT Entering distance along baseline
RCALL Call up of a distance along baseline
which has been previously stored
using the function "Polar
calculation".
Accept displayed values
Changing the direction (as dialog box "MODIFY
DISTANCE", page219).
Exit the program.
244 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
Enter lateral deviation/distance from start (Q):
COGO\ OFFSET 14:03
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP MODIF
M
C
Perpendicular offset from BL
Horiz.Dist. : 0.000 m
INV RCALL EDIT
Horiz.Dist. : Enter lateral deviation/distance from
start (Q)
Determining the lateral deviation/distance from start
(Q) by means of the function "Polar calculation" (refer
to chapter "Inverse").
INPUT Entering lateral deviation/distance
from start
RCALL Call up of a lateral deviation/distance
from start which has been previously
stored using the function "Polar
calculation".
Accept displayed values
Changing the direction (as dialog box "MODIFY
DISTANCE", page219).
Exit the program.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 245
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
The following dialog box shows the results of the
orthogonal point calculation:
COGO\ OFFSET RESULTS 14:03
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
Point no. : -----
Easting : 0.000 m
Northing : 0.000 m
Elevation : -----
STORE STAKE
Point no. : Entering point number of the lateral
point
Easting : Display of east coordinate
Northing : Display of north coordinate
Elevation : Entering height (optional)
The following results have been stored in the active
measurement data file:
WI 11 Station Point Number
WI 81 Easting coordinate
WI 82 Northing coordinate
WI 83 Elevation (optional)
If "Point no." has not be entered, the button is not
occupied.
Call up the program "Stakeout".
The program "Plotting" assumes that the instrument is
set and oriented to a known point.
If "Point no." has not be entered, the button is not
occupied.
Return to the menu "OFFSETS".
Exit the program.
246 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
Tbree Peiat 4rc
N
C
O
G
O
_
0
5
E
1
H N
3
2
Circle
centre
Search : Circle centre coordinates
(Y, X),
Radius
Given : Arc point 1 (Y, X),
Arc point 2 (Y, X),
Arc point 3 (Y, X)
Station coordinates and orientation need to have been
set correctly before the coordinates of point 1, 2 and/or
point 3 can be determined by measurement.
Radius
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 247
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
COGO\ FIRST PT ON ARC 14:03
INPUT MEAS SEARC NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
Rec. device : Memory Card
Search in : FILE01.GSI
Point/Code : 58
Manual entering of the first resp. the second resp. the
third arc point. The standard TPS 1000 input dialog box
appears.
Measuring the first resp. the second resp. the third arc
point. This function is described in chapter "Measure &
Record" (Measurement dialogue) of the "System"-user
manual.
Search for the coordinates of the first resp. the second
resp. the third arc point in the coordinate file. This
function is described in chapter "Setup" (Import
function) of the "System"-user manual.
Exit the program
or
Call up the function from the "COGO MENU"
248 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
The following dialog box shows the results of the
calculation:
COGO\ RADIUS PT RESULTS 14:03
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
Point no. : -----
Easting : 0.000 m
Northing : 0.000 m
Elevation : -----
Radius : 0.000 m
STORE STAKE
Point no. : Entering point number of the circle
centre
Easting : Display of east coordinate
Northing : Display of north coordinate
Elevation : Entering height (optional)
The following results have been stored in the active
measurement data file:
WI 11 Station Point Number
WI 81 Easting coordinate
WI 82 Northing coordinate
WI 83 Elevation (optional)
If "Point no." has not be entered, the button is not
occupied.
Call up the program "Stakeout".
The program "Plotting" assumes that the instrument is
set and oriented to a known point.
If "Point no." has not be entered, the button is not
occupied.
Return to the "COGO MENU".
Exit the program.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 249
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
heed Plas
latredactiea This manual describes the "ROADPLUS" program of
the TPS SYSTEM 1000 theodolite series.
The program allows for the stakeout of roads using the
typical offset method of construction staking. In
addition the program supports station equations, cross
section assignment by station, cross section definition,
cross section interpolation, superelevation, widening
and slope staking/catch points.
Alignment Definition
An alignment consists of the three basic components
which are horizontal alignment, vertical alignment and
cross-section template. "ROADPLUS" reads the
elements of each of these components from data files
that are in GSI file format. In addition, a file can be
created for entering cross-section stations for specific
locations such as points needed for the staking of
superelevation points. If station equations are needed,
"ROADPLUS" will read a file created for station
equations and apply the appropriate corrections.
Data Files
Each of the data files "ROADPLUS" reads contain the
necessary information specific to the component being
defined. The files have unique identifiers and must be in
the GSI file format:
Horizontal Alignment File ALN?????.GSI
Vertical Alignment File PRF?????.GSI
Template File CRS?????.GSI
Cross-section Assignment File STA?????.GSI
Station Equation File EQN?????.GSI
250 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
The five identifiers ALN, PRF, CRS, STA and EQN
identify the type of file and must be used when creating
the data files. The ? can be any valid DOS character.
The file extension GSI defines the file as a GSI file and
must be used.
1. Permitted elements in the Hz-alignment
Straight defined by chainage and
coordinates of starting point
Curve defined by chainage and
coordinates of starting point
Radius of arc (- = left-hand curve;
+ = right-hand curve)
Spiral defined by chainage and
coordinates of starting point
parameter A
1
of spiral (negative
parameter = spiral into left-hand
curve)
Compound curve defined by chainage and
coordinates of starting point
Radius of arc (R1, R2)
End of project (EOP) chainage and coordinates of
end-point
1
A = L x Rwhere L = length of spiral; R = radius of
curve
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 251
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
2. Permitted elements in V-alignments
Straight defined by chainage and height of
starting point
Curve defined by chainage and height of
starting point
radius of arc (- = crest; + = dip)
Parabola defined by chainage and height of
starting point
parameters of parabola
2
(- = crest; + = dip)
End of project (EOP) chainage and height of end-
point of gradient
3. Permitted elements in cross sections
Chainage
Offset
Height difference relative to axis
2
2p x (H - H
0
) = (S - S
0
)
S
0
, H
0
station and height of vertex
252 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
Creating Data Files
There are two methods that can be used to create the
necessary data files. If the program called "FILE
EDITOR" is loaded into the theodolite, all necessary
data for a given component can be entered through the
keyboard. To enter data on the computer a DOS pro-
gram called "ROADDATA.EXE" can be used. If you
create the files using the "ROADDATA.EXE" program,
the files must be copied to the PCMCIA card in a
directory called GSI.
The following table shows an overview of the max. file
sizes:
Type of file Limitations
Horizontal
alignment
No limitation for "RoadPlus";
max. 200 blocks for "File Editor"
Vertical
alignment
No limitation for "RoadPlus";
max. 200 blocks for "File Editor"
Cross section 200 data blocks
(number of points in a cross section
max. 48)
Cross section
assignment
100 data blocks
Station equation 100 data blocks
Program Overview
"ROADPLUS" allows measurements in one telescope
position only. A typical "ROADPLUS" session includes
the following steps:
1. Enter setup information for the instrument and orient.
2. Start the ROADPLUS program and configure.
3. Select the alignment files
4. Select a station
5. Pick a point on the cross-section to stakeout, enter an
offset, choose method.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 253
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
Call up the "Configuration-Editor".
Before selecting the alignment files to use, you should
enter the configuration parameters for the job.
6. Stake the point and record the data.
7. Choose another point on the cross-section and stake
it out.
8. When all selected points on the cross section have
been staked, enter a new station and repeat steps 5-7.
In the sections that follow, the operation of the program
will be covered in more detail. The concepts of the
program will be covered to assist you in becoming
proficient with the "ROADPLUS" program for normal
everyday operation such as staking a project with the
ROAD+\ SELECT ALN FILES 14:03
M
C
Horiz.Aln. : ALN_EX1
Vert. Aln. : PRF_EX1
Cross Secs : CRS_EX1
Crs.Assign : STA_EX1
Station Eq : EQN_EX1
Log FlName : ROADPLUS.LOG
LIST
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP CONF
0ettiag Sterted
Before starting the program, enter the setup information
for the location of the theodolite and orient the
instrument to the reference point.
From the "MAIN MENU: PROGRAMS" display, move
the highlighted cursor to the "ROADPLUS" program
and press on the keyboard of the instrument. This
will bring up the "SELECT ALN FILES" display.
The display illustration examples contain text and
values for example purposes only. The actual values
you will see on the display of your instrument will be
different.
254 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
0ealigaretiea
Start the "Configuration-Editor" from the "SELECT
ALN FILES" dialog.
ROAD+\ CONFIGURATION 14:03
M
C
INFO DFLT EDIT
3D Stake : ON
Crs.Intrpl. : OFF
Crs.Movemnt : Left > Right
Hinge mode : normal
Log File : ON
Log FlName : ROAD.LOG
Base Chainge : Enter the beginning chainage for the
project
End Chainge : Enter the ending chainage for the
project
Chainge Incr : Enter the chainage interval to be used
Hght. Shift : Enter a vertical shift value if needed.
The value entered will be applied to
the whole alignment.
Deflct. Tol. : Enter an angle tolerance for deflection
angles. Make this a small value but
not 0.
Chainge Tol. : Enter a value for chainage tolerance.
This value will determine how close
the point will be to a 0 location.
3D Stake : Use the key to toggle between
OFF or ON. For cut/fill capability this
should be set to ON.
Base Chainge : 0.000
End Chainge : 89.270
Chainge Incr : 10.000 m
Hght. Shift : 0.000 m
Deflct. Tol. : 000'16"
Chainge Tol. : 0.010 m
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 255
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
Crs. Intrpl. : The abbreviation means "Cross
Section Interpolation". When this is
set to ON, cross sections will be
interpolated both along and between
cross sections. The interpolation
between cross sections makes
superelevation and widening possible.
If cross section interpolation is enabled, all cross
sections must have the same number of points.
Use the key to toggle between
OFF and ON.
Crs. Movemnt: This function controls the movement
along the cross section.
Press to display the movement
options. There are three choices:
LEFT to RIGHT, RIGHT to LEFT
and NONE. The direction chosen is
for display purposes only. The
rodperson can go in any direction
desired along the cross section.
Hinge Mode : Normal: The points farest away from
the axis are used for calculation of the
slope piercing point.
Not from End Pts: The points farest
away from the axis are not used for
calculation of the slope piercing point,
i.e. the slope piercing point is already
available in the cross section
definition (catch point between digital
ground pattern and cross section).
256 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
ROAD+\ SELECT ALN FILES 14:03
M
C
Horiz. Aln.: ALN_EX1
Vert. Aln. : PRF_EX1
Cross Secs : CRS_EX1
Crs.Assign : STA_EX1
Station Eq : EQN_EX1
Log FlName : ROADPLUS.LOG
LIST
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP CONF
Log file : When the log file is set to ON, staked
out data can be stored in a file for
printing at al later date. Use the
key to toggle between OFF and ON.
Log FlName : Ente a file name for the log file. The
default file name can be used.
LogFlName appears only if "Log File
= ON" is seledted in the
"Configuration".
Displays date and version of the program.
Sets standard values. The values are displayed in dialog
on page 253.
Accepts and stores parameters displayed. Continues to
display "SELECT ALN FILES"
To proceed further, you must select a horizontal
alignment file. The other files are optional and are
dependent on what you are staking. For instance, if you
are only staking the shape of the road for clearing
purposes, then it would not be necessary to have a
vertical alignment, template, cross section assignment
or station equation file. If your application requires
these other files then you will need to select them.
All alignment files must be stored in the memory card
in the GIS directory.
Select 4ligameat liles
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 257
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
The horizontal alignment file contains the following
elements:
Station locations
Straight line segments
Circular curves
Spiral curves
Compound curves
End of Project (EOP)
Select the horizontal alignment file. A dialog box
appears with a list of all ALN?????.GSI files available.
Move the cursor to the file needed and press . The
"SELECT ALN FILE" display will return and the
cursor will be highlighting the vertical alignment file.
Horizontal Alignment
File
The template file contains the following elements:
Station location
Template name
Offset from centerline
Difference in height from the
centerline profile
Select the cross section file. A dialog box appears with
a list of all CRS?????.GSI files available. Move the
cursor to the file needed and press . The "SELECT
ALN FILE" display will return and the cursor will be
highlighting the Cross section assignment file.
Cross Section/template
File
Vertical Alignment File The vertical alignment file contains the following
elements:
Station locations
Straight line segments
Circular vertical curves
Parabolic vertical curves
End of Project (EOP)
Select the vertical alignment file. A dialog box appears
with a list of all PRF?????.GSI files available. Move
the cursor to the file needed and press . The
"SELECT ALN FILE" display will return and the
cursor will be highlighting the Cross Section file.
258 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
Cross Section Definition
When defining the cross section both a cut and fill
template can be created similar to the following
diagrams.
Cross section - Cut
Cross section - Fill
R
P
L
U
S
0
2
CL
Negative offset Positive offset
R
P
L
U
S
0
1
CL
Negative offset Positive offset
CL ... Centerline
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 259
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
The cross section assignment file contains the following
elements:
Cross Section name
Starting Chainage
A cross section assigned in this manner will remain in
effect until another cross section is defined. When the
file is created you designate the name of the template to
use and the chainage to begin using the template. The
next template name entered also contains a starting
chainage. A third template can be assigned to begin at
another chainage and so forth.
For example, the file might contain the following
information:
XSEC1, 0
XSEC2, 100
XSEC3, 300
XSEC1, 550
The program would interpret this to use the template
XSEC1 beginning at chainage 0 and end at chainage
1+00, use XSEC2 beginning at chainage 1+00 and end
at chainage 3+00, use XSEC3 from chainage 3+00 and
transition back to XSEC1 ending at chainage 5+50.
Select the cross section assignment file. A dialog box
appears with a list of all STA?????.GSI files available.
Move the cursor to the file needed and press .
Cross Section Assignment
File
260 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
Cross Section Interpolation
Cross sections can be interpolated both along the cross
section i.e. between defined points, and between cross
sections themselves. The interpolation between cross
sections makes superelevtion and widening possible.
The following diagrams illustrate these concepts.
R
P
L
U
S
0
4
C
L
100
130
150
Cross Section A
Interpolated Cross
Section
3
.
5
0
3
.
0
0
R
P
L
U
S
0
3
CL
CL offset
CL offset
Interpolated point Interpolated point
(horizontal)
Last point
on Xsec
H
H
Interpolation along a cross section
Cross Section B
(with widening)
Interpolation between cross sections
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 261
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
Superelevation/Widening
Superelevation is controlled by the cross sections.
Cross sections must be placed at the appropriate
chainage for the beginning of superelevation, full
superelevation and back to no superelevation.
The STA?????.GSI file contains these special locations
for cross sections as well as cross section locations for
widening. The diagram that follows illustrates the
concept for superelevation.
Superelvation governed by cross sections
5.5
6
.
0
6
.
5
7.0
A
B
C
D
Cross Section A
No Superelevation
Cross Section B
Intermediate
Cross Section C
Intermediate
CL
Cross Section D
Full Superelevation
R
P
L
U
S
0
5
262 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
Station Equation File Station equations are used to adjust the alignment
stationing. The most common reason for doing so is the
insertion or removal of curves. Inserting or removing a
curve would require re-calculating the stationing of an
entire alignment. Using station equations eliminates
this.
Station equations can create either a gap or overlap as
shown in the following diagram.
Select the station equation file. A dialog box appears
with a list of all EQN?????.GSI files available. Move
the cursor to the file needed and press . The
"SELECT ALN FILE" display will return and the
cursor will be highlighting the Log Filename. The
filename can be changed or the default name can be
accepted.
When all files have been selected. Continues to display
"CHAINAGE & OFFSET". Prior to the "CHAINAGE
& OFFSET" display appearing, you will see a brief
message about checking for errors in the selected files.
Forward Station Equation
Station Back 10 + 000 = Station Ahead 15 + 000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
R
P
L
U
S
0
6
1
3
2
4
8
9
10
5
6
7
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12 13
14
15
new
old
R
P
L
U
S
1
6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Backward Station Equation
Station Back 13 + 000 = Station Ahead 7 + 000
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12 13
2
3
4
5
6
7
new
old
R
P
L
U
S
1
4
R
P
L
U
S
1
5
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 263
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
File Checking During the file checking process, each file is inspected
for possible errors in the data format such as missing or
incorrect word index. If errors are found, an error
message is displayed indicating the type of error.
During the inspection process, if any errors are found
that would cause erroneous data to be computed and
displayed, the file checking routine will be aborted. If
this occurs, the file(s) containing the problem must be
fixed before continuing. In addition to checking for file
errors, geometrical components are checked. This
includes tangent directions of adjacent elements and
chord lengths of elements. Any deviations which exceed
permitted tolerances are displayed such as in the
following example.
ROAD+\ CHECKING FILES 14:03
M
C
ALN: Deflection tolerance
exceeded at chainage 1502.120.
Difference in directions
is 0"02'31". Override?
NO YES
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
Selecting the "NO" option to override will bring up
another display that says "Continue checking
alignment"? (no quotes). If you choose "NO" the
display will return to the "SELECT ALN FILES" menu.
If you choose "YES" the program will continue to
check the other files. If no other errors are found the
program will go to the opening "CHAINAGE &
OFFSET" display.
Selecting the "YES" option to override will cause the
program to override the error and continue to check
other files for possible errors. If no other errors are
found the program will go to the "CHAINAGE &
OFFSET" opening display.
264 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
Stekeeat 0siag heritea
tel 0llset
The most common method for staking out roads,
pavement, curb & gutter etc. is to use a horizontal offset
from the actual point. For instance, a four foot offset
from finished back of curb (BC) is commonly used to
provide cut/fill stakes for a street and curb lines.
Preparing for the
example
In this section of the manual, a sample project will be
used to demonstrate the procedures to follow for
staking a portion of the job. The project consists of a
3 m wide paved bicycle path with a curve. The project
will be staked on a 0.6 m offset from the edge of
pavement. The POB and PC will be staked for both
sides.
The example project for the TPS System
"ROADPLUS" program consists of a simple horizontal
and vertical alignment accompanied by a simple
template. The project is designed to illustrate the
application of the "ROADPLUS" System. It is not
intended to provide a demonstration of road design
procedures.
N
3
.0
3
0
.
0
Setup Point
R
P
L
U
S
0
7
1.15
3.0
0.6
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 265
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
Our bike path is about 30 m in length as illustrated here.
The riding surface is 3 m wide, lying 1.5 m on each side
of the centerline. From the edge of the driving surface,
fill slopes extend downward at a slope of 2:1.
The vertical alignment (or profile) for the project is a
simple 2% uphill slope. An assumed elevation of 30.50
is placed on the original ground at the Setup Point, and
the road starts at elevation 31.1. This allows you to
practice with all of the components of the
"ROADPLUS" program. For the field work, we
recommend a flat, open area about 25 m on a side.
The following pages contain illustrations and listings of
all the data needed to run the example.
There are 3 easy steps to the example:
1. Use the "ROADDATA.EXE" program on your
PC to enter the design information for the Hori-
zontal Alignment, Vertical Alignment, and
Templates.
A special naming convention identifies the type of
file that each alignment and template are stored in.
The first three letters in the file name tell
"ROADPLUS" what is in the file and how to view it.
The GSI extension is also required.
Horizontal Alignment: ALN?????.GSI
Vertical Alignment: PRF?????.GSI
Templates: CRS?????.GSI
In "ROADDATA.EXE", enter the following example
project data. Lets call the project "EXAMPLE" and
configure the units to m, 3 decimal places. Lets name
the files "ALN_EX1.GSI", "PRF_EX1.GSI", and
"CRS_EX1.GSI".
266 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
Horizontal Alignment: ALN_EX1.GSI
Station Element Rad/Par Template E N
0.000 Straight 0.000 Tutor 305.000 305.000
7.620 Curve 9.080 Tutor 305.000 312.620
20.298 Straight 0.000 Tutor 312.502 321.562
27.918 EOP 0.000 Tutor 320.007 322.885
R
P
L
U
S
0
9
2.000%
EOP
CHA=0+27.918
EOP EL=31.654
BOP CHA=0+00
BOP EL=31.10
Road Profile at 2.00%
Original Ground of Elevation 30.500
R
P
L
U
S
0
8
N
3 0 3 6 9 m
0+00
E: 314.15
N: 308.05
H: 30.50
0+6.10
PC CHA=0+7.62
E: 320.007
N: 322.885
R
oad C
enterline
0
+
1
8
.
3
0
0
+
2
4
.
4
E
dge of R
oad
E: 305.00
N: 305.00
H: 31.10
P
T

C
H
A
=
0
+
2
0
.
2
9
8
Setup Point
A
p
p
ro
x
. L
in
e o
f C
atch
P
o
in
ts
R = 9.080
E: 305.000
N: 320.240
PI
CHA=0+15.240
I=8000'00"
T=7.620
R=9.087
L=12.680
C=11.674
E=2.774
M=2.125
T
=
7.62
8000'00"
(88.889 gon)
L = 12.680
C = 11.674
T

=

7
.
6
2
E = 2.774
M = 2.125
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 267
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
Vertical Alignment : PRF_EX1.GSI
Chainage Element Rad/Par H
1 0 Straight 0 31.100
2 27.918 EOP 0 31.654
Template: CRS_EX1.GSI
The horizontal alignment file specifies a template for
each chainage. Our horizontal alignment file specifies
only one template, "TUTOR". You can, however,
specify different templates for any chainage as you may
require. We will define two templates, "TUTOR" and
"TYP_CUT", in our template file. Notice that while
running "ROADPLUS", you can switch templates at
any time.
Template sCLO s H
1 Tutor -35.000 -16.700
2 Tutor -1.500 -0.030
3 Tutor 0.000 0.000
4 Tutor 1.500 -0.030
5 Tutor 35.000 -16.700
6 TypCut -35.000 -16.630
7 TypCut -1.500 -0.030
8 TypCut 0.000 0.000
9 TypCut 1.500 -0.030
10 TypCut 35.000 -16.630
R
P
L
U
S
1
0
CL
-1.5, -0.03 0, 0 1.5, -0.03
35, -16.7
-35, -16.7
Slope extends well beyond expected Catch Point
Original Ground
268 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
2. Copy the alignment and template files to your
PCMCIA card. Copy the files into the GSI
subdirectory on your PCMCIA card. If the GSI
subdirectory doesnt already exist on the PCMCIA
card, you will need to create one. Place the PCMCIA
card in your instrument.
3. Set up the instrument in your work area and
stakeout the example roadway. Set the instrument
coordinates to the values shown for point 1 (see
figure page 264). Orient the instrument towards a
convenient "North", and set Hzo to zero (see figure
page 264). Start "ROADPLUS" and continue reading
this manual.
When the "CHAINAGE & OFFSET" display appears,
only the lower portion beginning with "Station" will be
visible. To view the entire display, use the green up/
down arrow keys on the keyboard to scroll up to the
top.
ROAD+\ CHAINAGE & OFFSET 14:03
M
C
Hght. Shift : 0.000 m
Chainge Incr : 25.000
Chainge : 0.000
Element : POB
Offset : 0.000 m
Hght Offset : 0.000 m
CHECK CH--> <--CH XSEC EDIT
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP STORE StaEq NOTE
Hght. Shift : Vertical shift applied to the whole
alignment.
Chainge Incr : The chainage increment set in the
configuration is displayed. If desired,
a new value can be entered.
Chainage : Enter the chainage location for the
points to be staked.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 269
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
Element : This displays the element for the
chosen chainage such as POB, PC,
CURVE etc.
Offset : Horizontal offset to apply to the
current chainage.
Hght Offset : Vertical offset to apply to the current
chainage.
Switches to measuring mode to allow for a
measurement to determine the chainage and offset for
the point shot. After taking the measurement, press
and the program will return to the "CHAINAGE
& OFFSET" opening display. The chainage value of
where the shot was taken along with the horizontal and
vertical offset are displayed.
Changes to the next chainage.
Changes to the previous chainage.
Activates the cross section options.
The result of the road chainage and offset is stored. Just
active after taking a measurement.
Activates the "Station Equation" option. Active only if a
"Station Equation File" is selected during display
"SELECT ALN FILES" (page 254).
Allows insertion of a note into a log file. This may be
use for comments, errors, etc.
Calls the dialog "POINT COORDS" in order to display
the coordinates of the point to be set out. From there,
calls the program "STAKEOUT".
270 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
Select Template point and
offset
The first step in the procedure is to select a point on the
cross section to be staked and enter the offset.
Access the cross section options.
ROAD+\ CROSS SECTIONS 14:03
M
C
1L
Chainage : 0.000
Hght. Shift : 0.000 m
Template : +000tutor
CL Offset : -1.500 m
CL Hgt Diff : -0.030 m
CATCH <- CENTR ->
Stake Offs. : -0.600 m
S.Offset Ht : Horizontal
Offset : 0.000 m
Hght Offset : 0.000 m
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP PLOT
1L : Indicates the location of the cross
section point in relation to the
centerline. In this example, the "1L"
means the first point of the template
left of centerline.
Chainage : Displays the current chainage.
Hght. Shift : Displays the vertical shift, if any,
applied to the whole alignment.
Template : Displays the template name being
used.
CL Offset : Displays the horizontal distance of the
template point from centerline (- for
left)
CL Hgt Diff : Displays the difference in elevation of
the template point between the
centerline and the point to be staked.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 271
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
Stake Offs. : This is the offset value that will be
used for setting the offset stake. If the
point is left of centerline, the value
entered must be a negative number.
S. Offset Ht : This display indicates the method used
in computing the elevation of the point
to be staked. The three methods are
"PREVIOUS ELEMENT",
"INTERPOLATED" and
"HORIZONTAL".
Offset : Horizontal offset to apply to current
chainage.
Hght Offset : Vertical offset to apply to current
chainage.
Activates the slope staking options
Move along the current cross section from right to left.
Sets the cross section point to the centerline
Move across the current cross section from left to right
Displays a plot of the template.
The first point we want to stake for the bike path is the
left edge of pavement. This point is 1.5 m left of
centerline so the "CL Offset" value should be set to
a -1.5 m.
Change the location to -1.5 m. The "CL Hght Diff"
value will automatically change to the correct vertical
difference based upon the design of the template.
272 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
The offset value needs to be set to a -0.600 m. The
negative value is used because the point to stake is left
of centerline.
To accept the value press .
The final step in the process is to select the method to
use for computing the elevation of the offset point to be
staked. The "ROADPLUS" program provides three
methods to choose from:
Horizontal - The elevation is computed
horizontally to the catch point.
Previous Element - The elevation is computed on an
extension of the grade of the
previous element.
Interpolated - The elevation is interpolated to
intersect the design slope of the
cross section.
The following illustration shows the three vertical
options for stake offset.
C
e
n
t
e
r
l
i
n
e
1
2
3
R
P
L
U
S
1
1
1 Horizontal
2 Previous Element
3 Interpolated
Stake Offset
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 273
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
The most common method used is the "HORIZON-
TAL" method.
To select this method, move the cursor to "S. Offset Ht"
and press to display the three options.
Move the cursor to "HORIZONTAL" and press .
This setting will remain as the current method until a
different method is chosen. Therefore it is not necessary
to go through the procedure every time.
Accepts and stores parameters set. Continues to display
"POINT COORDS".
Stakeout and Record
point
The "POINT COORDS" dialog displays the current
chainage location of the offset point to be staked. The
display also shows the value for the prism pole (Refl.
Height) and the Easting and Northing coordinates of the
offset point and the finished grade elevation of the
actual point (not the offset location).
ROAD+\ POINT COORDS 14:03
M
C
Chainage : 0.000
Refl.Height : 1.500 m
Easting : 331.000 m
Northing : 335.000 m
Elevation : 31.000 m
STAKE EDIT
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
Activates the stakeout program
274 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
STAKE\ POLAR STAKEOUT 14:03
M
C
Target no. : 3
Hz : 000'00"
Dist : 0.007 m
Height :FILL 1.320 m
Elevation : 32.700 m
ALL DIST REC TARGT NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP METHD PLOT
The polar method of stakeout is the default for
"ROADPLUS".
Turn the instrument until " Hz" is zero.
Line up the prism pole.
Measure the distance.
The " Dist" value indicates how far away the
measured point is from the point chosen to be staked. A
positive value means to move away from the instrument
by the amount shown. If the value is negative, move
towards the instrument. The display will also show the
cut or fill value for the measured point. When both the
horizontal circle and distance read zero or close to it,
the measurement can be recorded.
Record the staked out position, returns to the "CROSS
SECTIONS" display and automatically moves to the
next point on the cross section.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 275
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
Stakeout Next point on Cross Section
ROAD+\ CROSS SECTIONS 14:03
M
C
1R
Chainage : 0.000
Template : +000tutor
CL Offset : 1.500 m
CL Hgt Diff : -0.030 m
Stake Offs. : 0.600 m
CATCH <- CENTR ->
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
To set the offset stake for the right side of our example
project:
Set the "CL Offset" value to positive 1.500 m.
Note when you do this the position changes from "1L"
to "1R". Scroll down and highlight "Stake Offs.".
Change the offset value to positive 0.600 m.
Returns to the "POINT COORDS" display.
ROAD+\ POINT COORDS 14:03
M
C
Chainage : 0.000
Refl.Height : 1.500 m
Easting : 331.000 m
Northing : 335.000 m
Elevation : 31.000 m
STAKE EDIT
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
Stakeout the 0.600 m offset stake for the right side of
the bike path. The "POLAR STAKEOUT" display
returns.
276 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
STAKE\ POLAR STAKEOUT 14:03
M
C
Target no. : 4
Hz : 000'00"
Dist : 0.007 m
Height :FILL 1.320 m
Elevation : 32.700 m
ALL DIST REC TARGT NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP METHD PLOT
ROAD+\ CROSS SECTIONS 14:03
M
C
1R
Chainage : 0.000
Template : +000tutor
CL Offset : 1.500 m
CL Hgt Diff : -0.030 m
Stake Offs. : 0.600 m
CATCH <- CENTR ->
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
Measures the distance.
Record the point when it has been staked. The "CROSS
SECTION" display returns showing the next point on
the cross section to stake.
For this example, the last point staked was the 0.600 m
offset point for the right side. When the "CROSS
SECTIONS" display appears, the "CL Offset" changes
to the next point on the cross section. The next point to
stake is the 0.600 m offset for the right side at the next
station.
Exits from the "CROSS SECTIONS" display and
returns to the "CHAINAGE & OFFSET".
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 277
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
ROAD+\ CHAINAGE & OFFSET 14:03
M
C
Chainage : 0.000
Element : POB
Offset : 0.000 m
Hght Offset : 0.000 m
CHECK CH--> <--CH XSEC EDIT
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
Moves to the next chainage (you also may enter a
chainage). The chainage and offset display will change
to reflect the new chainage location.
Brings up the "CROSS SECTIONS" display.
ROAD+\ CROSS SECTIONS 14:03
M
C
1R
Chainage : 25.000
Template : +000tutor
CL Offset : 1.500 m
CL Hgt Diff : -0.030 m
Stake Offs. : 0.600 m
CATCH <- CENTR ->
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
In our example the last point staked was on the right
side. Rather than have the rod person cross back over to
the left side, it makes sense to stay on the right side and
stake that position and then cross over to the left side.
To stake the catch point on the right side:
Set the "CL Offset" from centerline value to positive
1.500 m. The offset value should be positive 0.600 m,
but should not require a change because that was the
last offset value used for the previous right side point.
Access the "POINT COORDS" display.
278 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
ROAD+\ POINT COORDS 14:03
M
C
Chainage : 25.000
Refl.Height : 1.500 m
Easting : 337.000 m
Northing : 340.500 m
Elevation : 31.200 m
STAKE EDIT
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
To stake the offset point on the right side for chainage
25+00:
Activates the stakeout program. The "POLAR
STAKEOUT" display will appear.
STAKE\ POLAR STAKEOUT 14:03
M
C
Target no. : 5
Hz : 000'00"
Dist : 0.010 m
Height :FILL 0.950 m
Elevation : 33.187 m
ALL DIST REC TARGT NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP METHD PLOT
Use the normal procedure previously outlined for
staking out the point.
Records the staked out position and returns to the
"CROSS SECTIONS" display.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 279
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
ROAD+\ CROSS SECTIONS 14:03
M
C
1L
Chainage : 25.000
Template : +000tutor
CL Offset : -1.500 m
CL Hgt Diff : -0.030 m
Stake Offs. : -0.600 m
CATCH <- CENTR ->
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
Change the "CL Offset" from centerline to negative
1.5 m. Change the "Stake Offs." value to negative
0.600 m.
Access the "POINT COORDS" display.
Access the stakeout program. Follow the stakeout
procedure previously outlined and record the staked out
point. When the "CROSS SECTIONS" display returns,
press to access the "CHAINAGE & OFFSET"
display.
ROAD+\ POINT COORDS 14:03
M
C
Chainage : 25.000
Refl.Height : 1.500 m
Easting : 331.000 m
Northing : 340.500 m
Elevation : 31.200 m
STAKE EDIT
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
280 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
heriteatel 0llset Steke
0at Sammer,
In this section, a brief summary of using the horizontal
offset method is provided. It is assumed the reader has
reviewed sections "Stakeout using horizontal offset"
through "Stakeout and recording" which provide a
detailed explanation of program functions. We
recommend making a copy of this short guide and
keeping it in the instrument case.
Start ROADPLUS & Set
Configuration Options
Start the "ROADPLUS" from the program menu.
Start the "Configuration-Editor" from the "SELECT
ALN FILES" dialog.
ROAD+\ CONFIGURATION 14:03
M
C
INFO DFLT EDIT
Base Chainge : 0.000
End Chainge : 89.270
Chainge Incr : 10.000 m
Hght. Shift : 0.000 m
Deflct. Tol. : 000'20"
Chainge Tol. : 0.010 m
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
Enter the beginning and ending chainage, the chainage
increment and so forth. Make all entries.
Returns to the "SELECT ALN FILES" display.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 281
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
Select Alignment Files
ROAD+\ SELECT ALN FILES 14:03
M
C
Horiz. Aln. : ALN_EX1
Vert. Aln. : PRF_EX1
Cross Secs : CRS_EX1
Crs.Assign : STA_EX1
Station Eq : EQN_EX1
Log FlName : ROADPLUS.LOG
LIST
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP CONF
Select the alignment files.
Place the cursor on each file type, press and pick
the file from the displayed list. Select the files.
The "CHAINAGE & OFFSET" options are displayed.
A horizontal file must be selected.
282 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
Set offset value and select
point to stakeout
ROAD+\ CHAINAGE & OFFSET 14:03
M
C
Chainage : 0.000
Element : POB
Offset : 0.000 m
Hght Offset : 0.000 m
CHECK CH--> <--CH XSEC EDIT
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
To select the template point to stake (back of curb, edge
of pavement etc.):
The "CROSS SECTIONS" options display appears.
ROAD+\ CROSS SECTIONS 14:03
M
C
1R
Chainage : 25.000
Template : +000tutor
CL Offset : 1.500 m
CL Hgt Diff : -0.030 m
Stake Offs. : 0.600 m
CATCH <- CENTR ->
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
Set the "CL Offset" value. This value is the distance
from centerline of the point you want to stake.
Move the cursor to "Template" and pick the cross
section template to use. Following set the "Stake Offs."
(stake offset value). If the point is left of the centerline,
enter the offset value as a negative value.
Continues with display "POINT COORDS".
or
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 283
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
Stakeout the point
ROAD+\ POINT COORDS 14:03
M
C
Chainage : 0.000
Refl.Height : 1.500 m
Easting : 331.000 m
Northing : 335.000 m
Elevation : 31.000 m
STAKE EDIT
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
The stakeout program will start with the polar stakeout
method being used.
STAKE\ POLAR STAKEOUT 14:03
M
C
Target no. : 4
Hz : 000'00"
Dist : 0.007 m
Height :FILL 1.320 m
Elevation : 32.700 m
ALL DIST REC TARGT NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP METHD PLOT
With the polar method, the theodolite is turned until the
displayed horizontal circle reading is zero degrees. The
rod person is moved on line and a distance is measured.
The results are displayed telling you how far from the
real point the prism pole is. Move the rodperson until
the distance shows near zero. The CUT/FILL value is
displayed along with the elevation of the point.
Record the point, and the "CROSS SECTIONS" display
returns.
Move to a new chainage. The "CHAINAGE & OFF-
SET" display returns.
284 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
Select new chainage
ROAD+\ CHAINAGE & OFFSET 14:03
M
C
Chainage : 0.000
Element : POB
Offset : 0.000 m
Hght Offset : 0.000 m
CHECK CH--> <--CH XSEC EDIT
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
Select a new chainage (you also may enter a chainage).
Select the point to stake out and the offset.
Repeat the procedure outlined in sections "Set offset
value and select point to stakeout" (page 282) through
"Select new chainage" (page 284). Continue in this
manner until all points have been staked.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 285
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
Slee Stekiag Slope staking involves determining a point where the
cross section template meets the ground surface. This
point of zero cut/fill is found primarily by trial and error
and a lot of computing. The following diagram
illustrates the concepts of slope staking.
The slope staking routine is accessed from the "CROSS
SECTIONS" display.
C
e
n
t
e
r
l
i
n
e
C
e
n
t
e
r
l
i
n
e
R
P
L
U
S
1
2
CL Offset
CL Offset
Catch Point
Cross
Section
Cross
Section
FILL
Catch Point
CUT
Plan View
Plan View
0+200.000
0+200.000
Chainage
Chainage
XS Hgt Diff
XS Hgt Diff
286 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
Start the "CROSS SECTIONS" display from the
"CHAINAGE & OFFSET" display.
ROAD+\ CROSS SECTIONS 14:03
M
C
1L
Chainage : 0.000
Hght. Shift : 0.000 m
Template : +000tutor
CL Offset : -1.500 m
CL Hgt Diff : -0.030 m
CATCH <- CENTR ->
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP PLOT
Before proceeding, move the cursor to the "Template"
option.
Choose the template to use for slope staking. If the
displayed template is the correct one, then it will not be
necessary to change it.
Start the slope stake program.
ROAD+\ SLOPE STAKING 14:03
M
C
Chainage : 0.000
Template : typcut
Xsection : CUT
CL Offset : 9.867 m
XS Hgt Diff : 1.089 m
Chainage : 3.254 m
ALL DIST REC TARGT
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP St=0 STORE I<>II REFPT
The "STORE" and "REFPT" options are not
available until after a measurement is taken.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 287
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
Measure to the current position of the prism pole.
The value for "XS Hgt Diff" needs to be zero or close
to it. When this value is zero the catch point has been
determined. However, the value for "Chainage" is also
important. This value shows where the actual point is in
relation to the chainage of the cross section being used.
In the sample display shown, the value for "XS Hgt
Diff" is 1.089 m. The value is positive which means the
catch point is higher than where the measurement was
taken. Therefore the rodperson would look for a spot
that is approximately 1 m higher than the current point.
Now look at the value for "Chainage". This indicates
where the prism pole is in relation to the chainage. In
this example, the rodperson would move approximately
3 m to his/her right looking towards the instrument. If
the value is negative the pole would be moved to the
left.
In addition, the horizontal distance from centerline is
displayed which is 9.867 m for this example.
After moving to a new location, measure a distance to
the prism and view the results. When the "XS Hgt
Diff" and "Station" are at or near zero the catch point
has been located both vertically and horizontally for the
chosen chainage.
Record the staked out position.
The "SLOPE STAKING" display returns and another
catch point can be staked.
Exit the slope staking program.
288 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
SLOPE STAKING Menu Function Key Summary
Measures the distance to the target, and automatically
records the data as defined by the currently set
recording mask.
Measures the distance only, and updates the display.
Records the information for the current measurements.
Permits the user to change the height of the target.
Stores the data to the log file.
The store function is not available until a
measurement is initiated with the "DIST" key.
Switches between face one and face two for
measurements.
After a measurement is made to the prism pole the
"REFPT" option will be available. See section
"Reference Point" for a detailed discussion of this
option.
Moves along the alignment until "Chainage" =0, that
is, move onto the correct cross section defined for that
point. This allows checking against the actual cross
section defined at that point.
The " St=0" function is not available until a
measurement is initiated with the "DIST" key.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 289
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
Reference Point
Displays additional information about how the location
of the prism pole relates to components of the cross-
section. Do this after a measurement has been made.
ROAD+\ REFERENCE POINT 14:03
M
C
1L
Chainage : 0.000
Template : typcut
Chainage : 3.254 m
Catch Offs : -0.347 m
Catch HgtD : -0.389 m
ALL DIST REC TARGT
Hinge Offs : 8.154 m
Hinge HgtD : -2.123 m
CL Offset : 9.213 m
CL HgtDiff : -1.124 m
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP STORE I<>II
1L : Indicates the location of the cross
section point in relation to the
centerline. In this example, the "1L"
means the first point of the template
left of centerline.
Chainage : Displays the current chainage.
Template : Displays the template name being
used.
Chainage : Displays where the rod is in relation to
the actual chainage. Move the rod to
the right as you are looking from the
pole towards the instrument if the
value is positive. If the value is
negative move to the left.
290 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
Catch Offs : This value is where the pole is in
relation to where the existing ground
intersects the design slope of the
template.
Catch HgtD : This value is the vertical difference
from the ground shot to where the
existing ground catches the template.
Hinge Offs : This is the horizontal distance from
the prism to where the template begins
the slope (hinges).
Hinge HgtD : The vertical difference between the
ground shot and the hinge point.
CL Offset : The horizontal distance from the
ground shot to the centerline.
CL HgtDiff : The vertical distance from the ground
shot to the centerline.
The following illustration represents the various
components of the REFPT option.
C
e
n
t
e
r
l
i
n
e
CL Offset
Hinge Offs
Catch Offs
R
P
L
U
S
1
3

C
L

H
g
t
D
i
f
f

H
i
n
g
e

H
g
t
D

C
a
t
c
h

H
g
t
D
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 291
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
0ete lermets The following describes the format and contents of the
data stored for alignments and cross-sections in the
RoadPlus program. All files are in GSI format and must
be located in the \GSI directory of the memory card.
The following geometric elements are supported:
Horizontal Alignment
Element Definition Declaration in the
alignment file
Tangent Coordinates (X,Y) to Coordinates (X,Y) "STRAIGHT"
Circular curve Beginning of arc (X,Y), Radius, "000CURVE"
End of arc (X,Y);
Spiral In Beginning of curve (X,Y), A-Parameter / "00SPIRIN"
Length of curve + Radius,
End of curve (X,Y);
Spiral out Beginning of curve (X,Y), A-Parameter / "0SPIROUT"
Length of curve + Radius,
End of curve (X,Y);
Compound Beginning of curve (X, Y), Radius 1, "0CURVEIN"
curve in Radius 2
Compound Beginning of curve (X, Y), Radius 1, "CURVEOUT"
curve out Radius 2
End of Project Coordinates (X,Y) "00000EOP"
Header of the Horizontal Alignment File:
41....+000JOBID 42....+HZALIGNM 43......+STACOORD
WI 41 Job-Identification. Max. 8 ASCII-characters,
may be defined by user.
WI 42 Identification of Horizontal Alignment file.
May not be changed by user.
WI 43 Identification of principal point type file. May
not be changed by user.
292 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
The data block for a principal point in the file is
structured as follows :
11....+KILOMETR 71....+0NEXTGEO 72....+0NEXTRAD
73....+0TEMPLNR 81..10+00000000 82..10+00000000
WI 11 Chainage of the point.
WI 71 Type of the following geometric element.
WI 72 Radius of the next horizontal geometric
element, Radius 1 for a compound curve, or
the A-Parameter for spirals.
WI 73 Number of a cross-section (Template) assigned
to the next geometric element.
WI 74 Radius 2 for compound curves.
WI 81 E-Coordinate of the point.
WI 82 N-Coordinate of the point.
Comments:
The header consists of a single block at the start of a
data file.
Tangents and the EOP contain 00000NON in
WI72
Data units in WIs 11 and 72 are defined by WI81
and WI82.
If the radius point for a curve (circular or spiral) is to
the left of the alignment in the direction of increasing
stations, the radius is negative.
If the radius point for a curve (circular or spiral) is to
the right of the alignment in the direction of
increasing stations, the radius is positive.
The same cross section (Template) may be assigned
to more than one location.
An alignment file must contain at least two elements.
There is no limitation on the size of the Hz-alignment
file. As a result, as many data blocks as you like can
be entered if a file is created on the PC using the
DOS program "ROADDATA.EXE". If a file is
created/edited using the program "FILE EDITOR"
on the TPS1000 there is a limitation of 200 data
blocks.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 293
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
Example of a Horizontal Alignment:
41....+0EXAMPLE 42....+HZALIGNM 43....+STACOORD
11....+00000000 71....+STRAIGHT 72....+00000NON
73....+QP000125 81..10+06000000 82..10+02000000
11....+00198832 71....+00SPIRIN 72....-00122474
73....+QP000123 81..10+06068005 82..10+02186841
11....+00348832 71....+000CURVE 72....-00100000
73....+QP000123 81..10+06150344 82..10+02307751
11....+00450725 71....+0SPIROUT 72....-00100000
73....+QP000123 81..10+06247816 82..10+02304071
11....+00550725 71....+STRAIGHT 72....+00000NON
73....+QP000125 81..10+06310759 82..10+02227794
11....+00714138 71....+00SPIRIN 72....+00054772
73....+QP000124 81..10+06392465 82..10+02086275
11....+00789138 71....+000CURVE 72....+00040000
73....+QP000124 81..10+06445859 82..10+02037807
11....+00824376 71....+0SPIROUT 72....+00044721
73....+QP000124 81..10+06478120 82..10+02048886
11....+00874376 71....+STRAIGHT 72....+00000NON
73....+QP000125 81..10+06496445 82..10+02094478
11....+01127904 71....+00000EOP 72....+00000NON
73....+QP000125 81..10+06540469 82..10+02344154
The principal points method allows joining elements
without the use of intermediate tangents.
The following combinations, for example, may be
defined:
Double spiral: spiral out followed by spiral in
Multiple circular curves
S curves with and without intermediate tangents
294 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
Vertical Alignment Geometric elements supported:
Element Definition Declaration in the
Alignment file
Tangent Coordinate (Km,H) to Coordinate (Km,H) "STRAIGHT"
Circular curve beginning of curve(Km,H), Radius, "000CURVE"
end of curve (Km,H);
Parabola Coordinate (Km,H), Parabola parameter / "0PARABOL"
Parabola length;
End of project Coordinate (Km,H) "00000EOP"
Vertical Alignment File Header:
41....+000JOBID 42....+0VALIGNM 43......+STACOORD
WI 41 Job-Identification. Max. 8 ASCII-characters,
may be defined by user.
WI 42 Identification of Vertical Alignment file. May
not be changed by user.
WI 43 Identification of principal point type file. May
not be changed by user.
Example for a data block for a vertical alignment
point:
11....+KILOMETR 71....+0NEXTGEO 72....+0NEXTRAD 83..10+00000000
WI 11 Chainage of a vertical alignment point
WI71 Type of the following geometric element
WI72 Radius of the following geometric element or
parabola parameter
WI83 Elevation of the point
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 295
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
Comments:
The header consists of a single block at the start of a
data file.
Tangents and the EOP contain 00000NON in
WI72
Data units in WIs 11, and 72 are defined by WI83.
Tangent and arc lengths may be calculated from the
stationing.
The stationing is projected onto a horizontal plane.
If the curve radius point lies above the centerline, the
radius is positive.
If the curve radius lies beneath the centerline, the
radius is negative.
An alignment file must contain at least two elements.
There is no limitation on the size of the V-alignment
file. As a result, as many data blocks as you like can
be entered if a file is created on the PC using the
DOS program "ROADDATA.EXE". If a file is
created/edited using the program "FILE EDITOR"
on the TPS1000 there is a limitation of 200 data
blocks.
Example of a vertical alignment file:
41....+0EXAMPLE 42....+0VALIGNM 43....+STACOORD
11....+00000000 71....+STRAIGHT 72....+00000NON
83..10+00400000
11....+00300000 71....+0PARABOL 72....-01142932
83..10+00422500
11....+00500000 71....+STRAIGHT 72....+00000NON
83..10+00420000
11....+00550000 71....+0PARABOL 72....+02091126
83..10+00415000
11....+00850000 71....+STRAIGHT 72....+00000NON
83..10+00406522
11....+01127904 71....+00000EOP 72....+00000NON
83..10+00418605
296 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
Cross Sections Geometric elements supported:
Header of the cross section file:
41....+00JOB_ID 42....+TEMPLATE
WI41 Job identification. Max. 8 ASCII characters,
user definable.
WI42 Template file identification. May not be
changed by user.
A data block for a cross section is structured as
follows:
11....+ PROF_NR 35....+DISTANCE 36....+000HDIFF
WI 11 The cross section number.
WI 35 Horizontal distance from the centerline.
WI 36 Height difference from the centerline.
WI 71 Cross section type.
WI 72 Slope ratio.
Element Definition
Height differences Height difference to the centerline
Distance Distance from the centerline
Cross section type Differentiate between CUT and
FILL cross sections
Slope slope ratio
Comments:
The header consists of a single block at the start of a
data file.
All data blocks having the same cross section
number (WI11) belong together.
All data blocks belonging to a cross section must be
consecutive in the file to minimize file access.
The data blocks for a cross section must be sorted by
ascending distance from the centerline.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 297
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
Cross-sections do not have to be sorted by number.
A negative distance (WI35) indicates a point to the
left of the centerline.
A positive distance (WI35) indicates a point to the
right of the centerline.
A negative height difference (WI36) indicates a point
below the centerline.
A positive height difference (WI36) indicates a point
above the centerline.
For a cross section file there is a limitation of 200
data blocks. The maximum number of points in a
cross section is 48.
A template file must contain at least one cross-section.
The entries for cross section type and slope are
optional.
The slope entry must be attached to the last point on
either side of the cross section.
Example:
41....+0EXAMPLE 42....+TEMPLATE
11....+QP000123 35..10-00013000 36..10-00003000
11....+QP000123 35..10-00010000 36..10-00005000
11....+QP000123 35..10-00004000 36..10-00000100
11....+QP000123 35..10+00004000 36..10+00000100
11....+QP000123 35..10+00010000 36..10-00006000
11....+QP000123 35..10+00013000 36..10-00003500
11....+QP000124 35..10-00012000 36..10-00002000
11....+QP000124 35..10-00011000 36..10-00004000
11....+QP000124 35..10-00004000 36..10+00000100
11....+QP000124 35..10+00004000 36..10-00000100
11....+QP000124 35..10+00011000 36..10-00005000
11....+QP000124 35..10+00012000 36..10-00002500
11....+QP000125 35..10-00012000 36..10-00002000
11....+QP000125 35..10-00011000 36..10-00002500
11....+QP000125 35..10-00004000 36..10-00000070
11....+QP000125 35..10+00004000 36..10-00000070
11....+QP000125 35..10+00011000 36..10-00002500
11....+QP000125 35..10+00012000 36..10-00002000
11....+TEMPLATE 35..41-00002000 36..11+00000000
71....+0000FILL 72....+00002000
11....+TEMPLATE 35..41-00000500 36..11+00000000
71....+0000FILL 72....+00000000
11....+TEMPLATE 35..41+00000000 36..11+00000000
71....+0000FILL 72....+00000000
11....+TEMPLATE 35..41+00001000 36..11+00000000
71....+0000FILL 72....+00000000
11....+TEMPLATE 35..41+00002000 36..11+00000000
71....+0000FILL 72....+00002000
298 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
Cross Section
Assignments
Elements supported.
WI41 Job identification. Max. 8 ASCII characters,
user definable.
WI42 Cross section assignment file identification.
May not be changed by user.
WI43 Name of the corresponding cross section file
A data block for a cross section assignment is
structured as follows:
110002+0000NORM 71....+00382000
WI 11 The cross section number.
WI 71 Beginning chainage for that cross section
Comments:
The header consists of a single block at the start of a
data file.
A cross section assignment file must have a
corresponding cross section file.
A cross section remains valid until a new cross
section is assigned.
A given cross section may be assigned to multiple
chainage.
The units for chainage are defined in WI 42 in the
file header.
For a cross section assignment file there is a
limitation of 100 data blocks.
Element Definition
Cross Section The number or identifier of the
number cross section
Chainage The chainage from which the
cross section is applied
Header of the Cross Section Assignment file:
410001+000asker 42..10+ASSIGNMT 43....+CRSASKER
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 299
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
Example:
410001+000asker 42..10+ASSIGNMT 43....+CRSASKER
110002+0000NORM 71....+00382000
110003+0000NORM 71....+00552000
110004+00000568 71....+00568000
110005+000568.1 71....+00568100
110006+000585.1 71....+00585100
110007+000585.2 71....+00585200
110008+0000NORM 71....+00611000
110009+0000NORM 71....+00775000
110010+00000811 71....+00811000
110011+000826.9 71....+00826900
110012+00000827 71....+00827000
110013+00000827 71....+00844000
110014+000826.9 71....+00844100
110015+00000860 71....+00860000
300 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
Station Equations
Elements supported
Element Definition
Station equation The number or identifier of the
number station equation
Chainage ahead The chainage to be applied going
forward along the alignment
Chainage back The chainage to be applied going
backward along the alignment
Header of the Station Equation file :
41....+00JOB_ID 42....+0STAEQTN
WI41 Job identification. Max. 8 ASCII characters,
user definable.
WI42 Station Equation file identification. May not
be changed by user.
A data block for a station equation is structured as
follows:
41....+00000001 42....+00100000 43....+00200000
WI 41 The station equation number.
WI 42 Chainage ahead.
WI 43 Chainage back.
Comments:
The header consists of a single block at the start of a
data file.
For a station equation file there is a limitation of 100
data blocks.
Example:
41....+00JOB_ID 42....+0STAEQTN
41....+00000001 42..10+00100000 43..10+00200000
41....+00000002 42..10+00566000 43..10+00600000
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 301
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
Log File If "Log File" is set to "ON" the measurements and the
results are stored in the ASCII-file specified within the
"Configuration Editor". This file is created in the
directory LOG on the memory card. Subsequently, you
can read the memory card on your PC and obtain a hard
copy of the Log-file.
Data will always be appended to the specified Log-file.
The Log-file contains the following information:
Header includes:
- the program used,
- information about the instrument,
- the file to store the measurement
data,
- the date and the time.
Configuration the name of the input files for:
- the Hz-alignment,
- the V-alignment and
- the cross section.
Measurement - Instrument station with coordinates
and instrument height.
- Stakeout point with heigth offset,
- offset
1
and height displacement
2
relative to centre line,
- comparison values from planning,
and associated differences.
1
This value results from
- the displacement of the zero point of the profile and
- the displacement taken from the transverse profile.
2
This value results from
- the displacement of the zero point of the profile and
- the displacement taken from the transverse profile
- the height displacement in the configuration.
302 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
Leica VIP RoadPlus V2.11
Instrument : TCM1100, Serial 412784, (not named)
User Templ. : User 1
Meas. File : FILE01.GSI
Program Start : 04/08/1995 at 10:23
Horizontal Aln : ALNSPORT.GSI
Vertical Aln : PRFSPORT.GSI
Cross Sections : CRSSPORT.GSI
Station : 1
E= 0.000m N= 0.000m ELV= 0.000m hi= 0.000m
Point No. : 55
Chainage : 150.000, Offset= 0.000m, Hght Offset= 0.000m
Design : E= -79.269m, N= 19.917m, ELV= 400.501m
Staked : E= -1.057m, N= 2.578m, ELV= 0.107m
Deltas : dE= -78.211m, dN= 17.339m, dELV= 400.394m
Point No. : 5
Chainage : 100.000, Offset= 0.000m, Hght Offset= 0.000m
Design : E= -46.305m, N= 26.708m, ELV= 400.409m
Staked : E= -0.000m, N= 2.774m, ELV= 0.051m
Deltas : dE= -46.305m, dN= 23.934m, dELV= 400.358m
Point No. : 5
Chainage : 100.785, Offset= 0.000m, Hght Offset= 0.000m
Design : E= -46.688m, N= 27.392m, ELV= 400.365m
Staked : E= -0.000m, N= 2.774m, ELV= 0.051m
Deltas : dE= -46.688m, dN= 24.619m, dELV= 400.314m
Example of a log file for the program "ROAD PLUS"
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 303
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
FE
lile Iditer
latredactiea The manual describes the program "FILE EDITOR
(GSI)" of the LEICA TPS SYSTEM 1000 theodolite
series. This version of the file editor is only valid for a
GSI configuration.
This program is used to open/to view and edit existing
project files for the program "RoadPlus" or for creation
of new project files.
In order to create new project files, the file names must
comply with certain rules.
1. Horizontal Alignment File
File Name: ALN?????.GSI
2. Vertical Alignment File
File Name: PRF?????.GSI
3. Template File
File Name: CRS?????.GSI
4. Station Equation File
File Name: EQN?????.GSI
5. Cross-section Assignment File
File Name: STA?????.GSI
You can insert a permitted character for a DOS file
name in place of a ?.
Type of file Limitations
Horizontal alignment 200 data blocks
Vertical alignment 200 data blocks
Cross section 200 data blocks
(number of points in a cross
section max. 48)
Cross section assignment 100 data blocks
Station equation 100 data blocks
The following table shows an overview of the max. file
sizes:
Creation of files
304 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
FE
Editing files
It is possible to insert also a new data set:
With function "Coordinate", point coordinates,
station coordinates or a code block can be inserted.
With function "Horizontal Alignment" a tangent, a
circular curve, a Spiral in, a Spiral out, a Curve in or
a Curve out can be inserted.
For the circular curve radius the following sign rule
applies:
With a right-hand curve (centre of circle right of
alignment) the sign is positive.
With a left-hand curve (centre of circle left of
alignment) the sign is negative.
With function "Vertical Alignment" a tangent, a
circular curve or a parabola can be inserted.
For the circular curve radius and/or the parabola
parameter the following sign rule applies:
If the centre of circle is above the alignment (dip) the
sign is positive.
If the centre of circle is below the alignment (crest)
the sign is negative.
With function "Template" an offset or a height
difference relative to axis can be inserted.
For the offset and/or the height difference the
following sign rule applies:
If the point is left of alignment the offset is negative.
If the point is right of alignment the offset is positive.
If the point is above the alignment the height
difference is positive.
If the point is below the alignment the height
difference is negative.
With function "Station Equation" a number for the
station equation, a station ahead or a station back can
be inserted.
With function "Cross-section Assignment" the name
of the template and the start station for this template
can be inserted.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 305
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
FE
0ea lile
Start program "FILE EDITOR" from the "MAIN
MENU: PROGRAMS" dialog.
FilEd\ OPEN FILE 14:03
INFO CREAT LIST
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
FILE EDITOR (GSI)
File Type : Coordinate
File Name : FILE04.GSI
File Type : Select type of file:
Coordinate, refer to chapter
"Coordinates"
Horiz. Align, refer to chapter "Hori-
zontal Alignment"
Vert. Align, refer to chapter "Vertical
Alignment"
Template, refer to chapter "Template"
Sta. Eqn., refer to chapter "Station
Equation"
CRS Assignmnt, refer to chapter
"Cross-section Assignment"
File Name : Select file name.
Displays date and version of the running application.
Create new file "Coordinate", see dialog page 306.
View and edit existing file.
306 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
FE
Coordinates
Press within dialog page 305 in order to create a new
file Coordinates (see dialog below).
Press within dialog page 305 in order to view and edit
the selected file (see dialog page 307 - 309).
FilEd\ CREATE FILE 14:03
LIST
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
File Type : Coordinate
File Name : FILE06.GSI
No.Decimals : 3
File Type : Display of type of file.
File Name : Select file name. Only files, which are
not created yet, can be selected.
No.Decimals : Select number of decimals.
Insert a new data set.
Insert point coordinates, see page 307.
Insert station coordinates, see dialog page 308.
Insert code block, see dialog page 309.
INSERT RECORD 14:03
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
1 Insert Point Coordinates
2 Insert Station Coordinates
3 Insert Code Block
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 307
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
FE
Call function "Insert Point Coordinates" in menu
"INSERT RECORD" (page 306).
FilEd\ VIEW / EDIT FILE 14:03
<-- --> SAVE INSRT IMPOR NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP |<-- -->| SEARC
M
C
2/ 3
Point no. : 9
Easting : 0.000 m
Northing : 0.000 m
Elevation : 0.000 m
2/ 3 : Sequence number of current point and
total number of points in the
measurement set. The scroll bar shows
the sequential position of the
measurements, graphically.
Point no. : Input of point number.
Easting : Input of easting.
Northing : Input of northing.
Elevation : Input of elevation.
Display of previous point.
Display of following point.
Save file.
Insert new data set, see dialog page 306, bottom.
Import of coordinates by reading in the active
coordinate file. This function is described in chapter
"Select user template ..." of the "SYSTEM" Users
Manual.
Goto start of file.
Goto end of file.
Point search, see dialog page 310.
308 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
FE
Call function "Insert Station Coordinates" in menu
"INSERT RECORD" (page 306).
FilEd\ VIEW / EDIT FILE 14:03
<-- --> SAVE INSRT NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP |<-- -->| SEARC
M
C
2/ 3
Point no. : 9
Stn.Eastng : 0.000 m
Stn.Northg : 0.000 m
Stn.Elev. : 0.000 m
2/ 3 : Sequence number of current point and
total number of points in the
measurement set. The scroll bar shows
the sequential position of the
measurements, graphically.
Point no. : Input of point number.
Stn. Eastng : Input of station easting.
Stn. Northg : Input of station northing.
Stn. Elev. : Input of station elevation.
Meaning of the function keys is similar to dialog page
307.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 309
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
FE
Call function "Insert Code Block" in menu "INSERT
RECORD" (page 306).
FilEd\ VIEW / EDIT FILE 14:03
<-- --> SAVE INSRT NUM
M
C
2/ 3
Code : 1
Info 1 : +00000000
Info 2 : +00000000
Info 3 : +00000000
Info 4 : +00000000
Info 5 : +00000000
Info 6 : +00000000
Info 7 : +00000000
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP |<-- -->| SEARC
2/ 3 : Sequence number of current point and
total number of points in the
measurement set. The scroll bar shows
the sequential position of the
measurements, graphically.
Code : Input of code number.
Info 1-7 : Input of information 1 to 7.
Meaning of the function keys is similar to dialog page
307.
310 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
FE
Start dialog "SEARCH" in dialogs "VIEW / EDIT
FILE" (pages 307 - 309).
FilEd\ SEARCH 14:03
SEARC NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
Direction : Forward
Point/Code : -----
Direction : Forward: Searching for point or
code numbers in direction end of file.
Backward: Searching for point or
code numbers in direction start of file.
Point/Code : Input of point or code number.
Point search. or
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 311
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
FE
Horizontal Alignment
Create new file "Horiz. Align" in dialog page 305, see
dialog bottom.
View and edit selected file in dialog page 305, see
dialog page 312/314.
FILED\ CREATE FILE 14:03
NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
File Type : Horiz. Align
File Name : -----
No.Decimals : 3
File Type : Display of type of file.
File Name : Input of file name (max. 5 char.), see
chapter "Introduction".
No.Decimals : Selection of number of decimals.
Insert new Header, see dialog page 312.
312 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
FE
FilEd\ VIEW / EDIT FILE 14:03
SAVE INSRT NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP |<-- -->| SEARC
M
C
1/ 1
Job Id : JOB_ID
File Id : HZALIGNM
File Type : STACOORD
1/ 1 : Sequence number of current point and
total number of points in the
measurement set. The scroll bar shows
the sequential position of the
measurements, graphically.
Job Id : Input of job identification.
File Id : Display of horizontal alignment file.
File Type : Display for the main point method.
Save file.
Insert new data set.
Goto start of file.
Goto end of file.
Point search.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 313
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
FE
INSERT RECORD 14:03
M
C
1 Insert Tangent
2 Insert Circular Curve
3 Insert Spiral In
4 Insert Spiral Out
5 Insert Curve In
6 Insert Curve Out
Insert Tangent.
Insert Circular Curve.
Insert Spiral In.
Insert Spiral Out.
Insert Curve In, see dialog page 314.
Insert Curve Out.
Insert End Of Positioning.
The function "Insert Curve In" is used as an example.
For the other functions refer to dialog page 314.
7 Insert End Of Positioning
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
314 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
FE
Call function "Insert Curve In" in menu "INSERT
RECORD" (page 313).
FilEd\ VIEW / EDIT FILE 14:03
<-- --> SAVE INSRT IMPOR EDIT
M
C
2/ 3
Station : 0.000 m
Ele Type : Curve In
Radius 1 : 0.000 m
Template : TEMPLATE
Radius 2 : 0.000 m
Easting : 0.000 m
Northing : 0.000 m
2/ 3 : Sequence number of current point and
total number of points in the
measurement set. The scroll bar shows
the sequential position of the
measurements, graphically.
Station : Input of station (chainage).
Ele Type : Display of geometric element.
Radius 1 : Input of circular curve radius 1.
Template : Input of name/number of cross
section.
Radius 2 : Input of circular curve radius 2.
Easting : Input of easting.
Northing : Input of northing.
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP |<-- -->| DEL SEARC
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 315
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
FE
Display of previous point.
Display of following point.
Save file.
Insert new data set.
Import of coordinates either by manual input or by
reading in the active coordinate file. This function is
described in chapter "Select user template ..." of the
"SYSTEM" Users Manual.
Goto start of file.
Goto end of file.
Delete a data block.
Point search.
316 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
FE
Start dialog "SEARCH" in the dialogs "View / Edit
File" (pages 312, 314).
FilEd\ SEARCH 14:03
SEARC EDIT
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
Direction : Forward
Station : ----- m
Direction : Forward: Searching for station in
direction end of file.
Backward: Searching for station in
direction start of file.
Station : Input of station (chainage).
Search for station.
or
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 317
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
FE
Vertical Alignment
Create new file "Vert. Align" in dialog page 305, see
dialog bottom.
View and edit selected file in dialog page 305, see
dialog page 318 , 319.
FilEd\ CREATE FILE 14:03
NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
File Type : Vert. Align
File Name : -----
No.Decimals : 3
File Type : Display of type of file.
File Name : Input of file name (max. 5 char.), see
chapter "Introduction".
No.Decimals : Selection of number of decimals.
Insert new Header.
FilEd\ VIEW / EDIT FILE 14:03
SAVE INSRT NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP |<-- -->| SEARC
M
C
1/ 1
Job Id : JOB_ID
File Id : 0VALIGNM
File Type : STACOORD
318 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
FE
1/ 1 : Sequence number of current point and
total number of points in the
measurement set. The scroll bar shows
the sequential position of the
measurements, graphically.
Job Id : Input of job identification.
File Id : Display for the vertical alignment file.
File Type : Display for the main point method.
Meaning of the function keys is similar to dialog page
312.
INSERT RECORD 14:03
M
C
1 Insert Tangent
2 Insert Circular Curve
3 Insert Parabola
4 Insert End Of Positioning
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
Insert Tangent.
Insert Circular Curve.
Insert Parabola, see dialog page 319.
Insert End Of Positioning.
The function "Insert parabola" is used as an example.
For the other functions refer to dialog page 319.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 319
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
FE
2/ 3 : Sequence number of current point and
total number of points in the
measurement set. The scroll bar shows
the sequential position of the
measurements, graphically.
Station : Input of station (chainage).
Ele Type : Display of geometric element.
Parameter : Input of parabola parameter.
Elevation : Input of elevation.
Meaning of the function keys is similar to dialog page
314.
FilEd\ VIEW / EDIT FILE 14:03
<-- --> SAVE INSRT IMPOR EDIT
M
C
2/ 3
Station : 0.000 m
Ele Type : Parabola
Parameter : 0.000 m
Elevation : 0.000 m
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP |<-- -->| DEL SEARC
Call function "Insert Parabola" in menu "INSERT
RECORD" (page 318).
320 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
FE
Start dialog "SEARCH" in the dialogs "View / Edit
File" (pages 317, 319).
FilEd\ SEARCH 14:03
SEARC EDIT
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
Direction : Forward
Station : ----- m
Direction : Forward: Searching for station in
direction end of file.
Backward: Searching for station in
direction start of file.
Station : Input of station (chainage).
Search for station.
or
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 321
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
FE
Template
Create new file "Template" in dialog page 305, see
dialog bottom.
View and editselected file in dialog page 305, see
dialoges page 322/323.
FilEd\ CREATE FILE 14:03
NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
File Type : Template
File Name : -----
No.Decimals: 3
File Type : Display of type of file.
File Name : Input of file name (max. 5 char.), see
chapter "Introduction".
No.Decimals : Selection of number of decimals.
Insert new Header, see dialog page 322.
322 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
FE
FilEd\ VIEW / EDIT FILE 14:03
SAVE INSRT NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP |<-- -->| SEARC
M
C
1/ 1
Job Id : JOB_ID
File Id : TEMPLATE
1/ 1 : Sequence number of current point and
total number of points in the
measurement set. The scroll bar shows
the sequential position of the
measurements, graphically.
Job Id : Input of job identification.
File Id : Display of cross section file.
Meaning of the function keys is similar to dialog page
312.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 323
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
FE
FilEd\ VIEW / EDIT FILE 14:03
<-- --> SAVE INSRT EDIT
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP |<-- -->| DEL SEARC
M
C
2/ 3
Template : TEMPLATE
Hz-Dist. : 0.000 m
SO Ht diff : 0.000 m
Cut/Fill : FILL
Slope ratio : 0.000
2/ 3 : Sequence number of current point and
total number of points in the
measurement set. The scroll bar shows
the sequential position of the
measurements, graphically.
Template : Input of name/number of cross section
point.
Hz-Dist. : Input of horiz. distance of cross
section point.
SO Ht diff : Input of nom. height difference of
cross section point to axis.
Cut/Fill : Selection of cross section type.
Available are:
CUT
FILL
STANDARD
Slope ratio : Input of slope ratio.
Meaning of the function keys is similar to dialog page
314.
324 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
FE
Start dialog "SEARCH" in the dialogs "View / Edit
File" (pages 322, 323).
FilEd\ SEARCH 14:03
SEARC NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
Direction : Forward
Template : -----
Direction : Forward: Searching for templates
in direction end of file.
Backward: Searching for templates
in direction start of file.
Template : Input of template name.
Search for templates.
or
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 325
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
FE
Station Equation
Create new file "Sta. Eqn." in dialog page 305, see
dialog bottom.
View and edit selected file in dialog page 305, see
dialogs page 326/327.
FilEd\ CREATE FILE 14:03
NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
File Type : Sta. Eqn.
File Name : -----
No.Decimals : 3
File Type : Display of type of file.
File Name : Input of file name (max. 5 char.), see
chapter "Introduction".
No.Decimals : Selection of number of decimals.
Insert new Header, see dialog page 326.
326 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
FE
FilEd\ VIEW / EDIT FILE 14:03
SAVE INSRT NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP |<-- -->| SEARC
M
C
1/ 1
Job Id : JOB_ID
File Id : 0STAEQTN
1/ 1 : Sequence number of current point and
total number of points in the
measurement set. The scroll bar shows
the sequential position of the
measurements, graphically.
Job Id : Input of job identificaton.
File Id : Display for the station equation file.
Meaning of the function keys is similar to dialog page
312.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 327
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
FE
FilEd\ VIEW / EDIT FILE 14:03
<-- --> SAVE INSRT NUM
M
C
2/ 3
Sta. Eqn. : 0
Ahead : 0.000 m
Back : 0.000 m
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP |<-- -->| DEL SEARC
2/ 3 : Sequence number of current point and
total number of points in the
measurement set. The scroll bar shows
the sequential position of the
measurements, graphically.
Sta. Eqn. : Input of number of station equation.
Ahead : Input of station ahead.
Back : Input of station back.
Meaning of the function keys is similar to dialog page
314.
328 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
FE
FilEd\ SEARCH 14:03
SEARC NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
Direction : Forward
Sta. Eqn. : -----
Direction : Forward: Searching for station
equations in direction end of file.
Backward: Searching for station
equations in direction start of file.
Sta. Eqn. : Input of number of station equation.
Search for station equations.
Start dialog "SEARCH" in dialogs "View / Edit File"
(pages 326, 327).
or
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 329
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
FE
Cross-section Assignment
Create new file "CRS Assignmnt" in dialog page 305,
see dialog bottom.
View and edit selected file in dialog pagee 305, see
dialogs page 330/331.
FilEd\ CREATE FILE 14:03
NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
File Type : CRS Assignmnt
File Name : -----
No.Decimals: 3
File Type : Display of type of file.
File Name : Input of file name (max. 5 char.), see
chapter "Introduction".
No.Decimals : Selection of number of decimals.
Insert new Header, see dialog page 330.
330 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
FE
FilEd\ VIEW / EDIT FILE 14:03
SAVE INSRT NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP |<-- -->| SEARC
M
C
1/ 1
Job Id : JOB_ID
File Id : ASSIGNMT
CRS File : CRSCCCCC.GSI
1/ 1 : Sequence number of current point and
total number of points in the
measurement set. The scroll bar shows
the sequential position of the
measurements, graphically.
Job Id : Input of job identification.
File Id : Display of section assignment file.
CRS File : Selection of relevant cross section file.
Meaning of the function keys is similar to dialog page
312.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 331
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
FE
FilEd\ VIEW / EDIT FILE 14:03
<-- --> SAVE INSRT LIST
M
C
2/ 3
Template : TEMPLATE
Station : 0.000 m
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP |<-- -->| DEL SEARC
2/ 3 : Sequence number of current point and
total number of points in the
measurement set. The scroll bar shows
the sequential position of the
measurements, graphically.
Template : Selection of template.
Station : Input of start station for this template.
Meaning of the function keys is similar to dialog page
314.
332 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
FE
FilEd\ SEARCH 14:03
SEARC EDIT
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP
M
C
Direction : Forward
Station : ----- m
Direction : Forward: Searching for templates
in direction end of file.
Backward: Searching for templates
in direction start of file.
Station : Input of station (chainage).
Search for station.
Start dialog "SEARCH" in dialogs "View / Edit File"
(pages 330, 331).
or
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 333
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
DE
MO
The manual describes the "Monitoring" program of the
Leica TPS SYSTEM 1000 theodolite series.
The program allows for automatic measurement
repetition.
Neaiteriag
Introduction
The instrument must be firmly mounted on a tripod or
pillar.
Requirements to run this program:
the licence number
a PCMCIA card which is inserted into the instrument
By means of a timer function, the program can trigger
the automatic measurement, at predetermined intervals,
of points which have already been measured once and
learned by the instrument and which are stored on the
PCMCIA card.
Max. 50 measuring points and as many measurement
repetitions as desired, at any time intervals.
M
O
N
I
-
0
1
334 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
DE
MO
The measurements can be:
repeated as often as is necessary,
at any time
performed in both faces.
The point number, the horizontal and vertical angles
and the slope distance for the individual measurements
are stored on the memory card.
The points to be measured must be permanently
equipped with Leica prisms.
The measurements are limited only by the storage
capacity of the PCMCIA memory card.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 335
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
DE
MO
Neia meaa
MONIT\ MONITORING MENU 14:03
INFO
HELP
M
C
1 Point Selection
2 Timer Selection
3 Point Measurement
4 End Monitoring
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
Selection of points to be measured, see page 336.
Set timer requirements, see page 339.
Start point measurement, see page 340.
Exit the "Monitoring" program.
336 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
DE
MO
Selectiag eiats The points to be measured are selected from this menu:
by storing the appropriate measurement file, points
already measured at the same station
by entering the LEARNED file, points yet to be
determined.
MONIT\ POINT SELECTION 14:03
MEAS SELCT LIST
HELP
M
C
Control : LEARNED
Total Pts. : 24
Select Pts. : 24
Two Faces : YES
To learn points, the "LEARNED" file must be used as a
control file.
To use points from another file, use (LIST) to
switch to the file selection und whlen die gewnschte
Datei.
The point file must:
be in the GSI directory on the PCMCIA card,
include the point numbers and the angle
measurements.
The instrument itself must have been positioned.
With the "Two Faces" option you can alternate between
one-face and two-face measurement.
If you choose the two-face option, every single
measurement is stored on the PCMCIA card.
Calls the measurement menu, for first-time point
measurement.
Calls the point selection.
Selects from the list of GSI files.
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 337
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
DE
MO
Neesaremeat meaa
MONIT\ LEARN POINT 14:03
ALL DIST REC TARGT DONE NUM
HELP I<>II
M
C
If the measurement file already includes points with the
same point number, then when this function is called
you will be asked whether the points are to be written
over.
For the instrument to learn a point, the prism must be
targeted manually
Triggering the distance measurement then initiates a
distance measurement and a precise determination of
the angle.
Measure the distance.
Store the measurement into the selected file.
Quit the function after all points have been measured;
return to the "POINT SELECTION" menu.
(ALL) does not have any functions, for
measuring and recording it is imperative to use
and .
The points will be saved in the set measurement file
(refer to chapter "Select user template and
measurement file" of "System" - user manual).
Point no. : 2
Remark 1 : -----
Refl.Height : 0.0000 m
Hz : 28147'05"
V : 9215'36"
Horiz.Dist. : 145.4821 m
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
338 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
DE
MO
Selectiag tbe eiats te
be meesared
Start selection of the points to be measured in the dialog
"POINT SELECTION" (page 336).
ALL DIST REC ZIEL ENDE NUM
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
HELP NONE ALL POSIT
MONIT\ POINT SELECTION 14:03
--> DONE OUT
M
C
Point no. : 1
Selected : IN
Hz : 12613'42"
V : 8944'11"
Slope Dist. : 29.7961 m
In this menu, you can select the points which you
require for the automatic measurement.
A selected point can be either activated or deactivated.
Several points with the same point number can be
present.
When you have selected all the points you require, press
(DONE) to quit the menu.
Display the next point in the file.
Quit the menu and goes to the main menu for the point
selection (page 336).
Alternates between switching a point "IN" and "OUT".
No point from the current file is to be selected.
All points from the current file are to be selected.
Position the instrument for the point selected.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 339
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
DE
MO
Timer selectiea
MONIT\ TIMER SELECTION 14:03
EDIT
HELP
M
C
This menu decides when the measurement will be taken.
Enter the date and time for the beginning and end of the
measurement.
An interval of at least one minute between
measurements must be defined.
The number of repeats can be defined in the field
"Repetitions".
Edit the preset values.
Beg Date : 18/07/97
Beg Time : 16:00:00
End Date : 30/08/97
End Time : 00:00:00
Delay : 0h 1m
Repetitions : 2
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
340 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
CO
RP
DE
MO
Peiat meesaremeat Choosing this option starts the measurement.
If a point cannot be measured, the TCA starts its internal
search routine and, if unsuccessful, goes on to the next
point to be measured.
Abort the automatic measurement.
Iad meaiteriag This option terminates the "Monitoring" program.
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 341
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
IX
ladex
k
Abort 340
Abscissa 238, 241
Additional applications 16
Alignment 175
Angular correction 168
Arcs 120
Area 117
Azimuth and distance 64
8
Backsight azimuth 152
Base point 106, 238
Baseline points 95
0
Calling up the program 25
Calls ON-LINE help 26
Calls up code input 26
CAUTION 4
Centre-line offset 171
Chainage 171
Closes application 26
Coarse positioning 60
COGO 205
Computation of area 117
Create coordinate file 306
Create cross-section assignment file 329
Create horizontal alignment file 311
Create station equation file 325
Create template file 321
Create vertical alignment file 317
Cross section assignment 259, 298
Cross section interpolation 260
Cross sections 180, 201, 296
342 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
IX
0
DANGER 4
Data exchange 24
Designation of keys 26
Determination of the station elevation 27
Direction measurements 129
I
File editor 303
Free station 79
6
General notes 23
h
Hidden point 111
Hz-alignment 192, 291
l
Important paragraphs 4
Installation in the PC 12
Instrument field setup 24
Intersections 221
Introduction 11
Inverse 209
l
Licence code 11, 21
Line offset 60
Loading application programs 20
Loading system texts 19
Local coordinates 165
Local resection 165
Local station elevation 165
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 343
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
IX
M
Measurement file 336, 337
Measurement menu 337
Measurement repetition 333
Monitoring 333
h
Naming files 15
0
Offsets 237
Ordinate 238, 241
Orientation 79, 83, 168
Orientation and height transfer 27
Orientation correction
27, 32, 38, 44, 47, 84, 90, 168
Oriented direction 31, 43, 83
Orthogonal 62
Orthogonal stakeout 68
P
PCMCIA memory card 334
Perimeter 123, 124
Point measurement 340
Polar calculation 209
Polar stakeout 66
Pole 111
Polygon mode 53, 54
Polygonal mode 49, 58
Product identification 3
Project files 303

Radial methods 49
Radial mode 50, 53, 54
Reference line 93, 98
Reference point 289
Remote height 105
Remote point 108
Resection 39
Road line 171
Road plus 249
344 TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en Leica
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
IX
8
Scale factor 84
Select stakeout method 74
Selecting points 336
Sets of angles 129
Sideshot 153
Sideshot point 154, 155
Sideshots 147
Slope staking 285
Software upload 17
Stakeout 59, 66, 183
Stakeout from coordinate differences 72
Stakeout with auxiliary points 70
Standard applications 11, 16
Station equations 262, 300
Superelevation 261
1
Three point arc 246
Tie distance 49
Timer selection 339
TRANSFER 19, 20
Traverse 147, 212
Traverse point 153, 154, 155
Two faces 336
0
Units in this manual 23
Using the program 24
V
V-alignment 197, 294
w
WARNING 4
WORKBENCH 13, 14
X
X-section Check 184
Leica TPS-System 1000 Programs-2.3.1en 345
IV
EL
AH
OH
BS
SM
AS
FS
BL
HB
KM
FB
SA
PZ
LB
TB
IX
leice 0ees,stems 40,
heerbragg, Snitterlead
bes beea certilied es beiag
eaied nitb e aelit,
s,stem nbicb meets tbe
lateraetieael Steaderd el
0aelit, Neaegemeat ead
0aelit, S,stems
(lS0 steaderd 0001l
Tetel 0aelit, Neaegemeat
0ar cemmitmeat te tetel
castemer setislectiea
4sk ,ee/ /ets/ /s/ts ssst /e/
me/s /s/e/mst/es s/eet ee/
70M c/e/sm
/s/ts ses,stsms 4
se4ss,
lh043b hss///e
/Su/tcs//ss4/
//ess -41 71 727 31 31
/ss -41 71 727 4 73
uuu./s/ts.tem
Printed in switzerland - Copyright Leica Geosystems AG, Heerbrugg,
Switzerland 1998
Translation of original text (664901-2.3.1de)
664901-2.3.1en